TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

(VOLUME-II)

CONTENTS

SECTION-I GENERAL INFORMATION & SCOPE

SECTION-II GENERAL TECHNICAL CONDITIONS
SECTION-III SURVEY AND SOIL INVESTIGATION
SECTION-IV TOWER, FOUNDATION, ERECTION, STRINGING AND COMMISSIONING OF
LINE
SECTION-V GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
SECTION-VI HARDWARE FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES
SECTION-VIII INSULATOR
SECTION-X OPGW
SECTION-X-A OPGW GUIDELINES FOR OFFLINE INSTALLATION & SPLICING
SECTION-XI DRAWINGS

Note: The said Technical Specification is for all the activities including supply
of materials, the bidders are requested to consider only those sections
pertaining to the work under scope of subject bidding.

*Strikeout/delete whichever is not applicable

SECTION -I
 SECTION-I
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1. General Information and Scope
1.1 Scope

1.1.1 The diversion work of following POWERGRID existing transmission lines are included
in the scope of the Contractor

Sl No Name of Line/ Diversion Line Length (Km)

1 400 kV S/C Agra- Ballabhgarh Transmission Line 0.781

2 400 kV S/C Agra- Bassi Transmission Line 0.792

Total Line Length (Km) 1.573

The scope of work under the contract includes survey, dismantling and erection
work of diverted portion including supply of material excluding tower/ stub
materials and conductor.

1.1.2 This Specification covers the following scope of works:

(i) Detailed survey including route alignment, profiling, tower spotting,
optimization of tower locations, soil resistivity measurement & geotechnical
investigation (including special foundation locations viz. pile/well foundation
locations, whenever applicable & covered under BPS);
(ii) Check survey;
(iii) Supply of all types of tower accessories like phase plate, circuit plate (where
ever applicable), number plate, danger plate, anti-climbing device, Bird
guard(where ever applicable);
(iv) Supply of
a) Earth wire, Hardware Fittings and Conductor & Earth wire Accessories
b) Insulators
c) OPGW & associated fittings & accessories.
(v) Classification of foundations for different type of tower and casting of
foundations for tower footings as per Employer’s foundations drawing;
(vi) Supply & Installation of Tower Earthing

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 1 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 (vii) Supply & installation of Insulated Conductor sleeve, (if required & covered
under BPS);
(viii) For transmission lines, to promote mechanization and safe working conditions,
use of crane is being promoted. Erection of towers, tack welding of bolts and
nuts including supply and application of zinc rich paint, fixing of insulator
strings, stringing of conductors and earth wires/OPGW* along with all
necessary line accessories by using crane(wherever feasible). However, where
usage of crane is not possible, erection of towers has to be carried out by
conventional method i.e using Gin pole, Derrick, Centre mast etc. through
usage of Power Operated Winch Machines. No tractor shall be allowed for
tower erection.;
(ix) De-stringing & dismantling of existing 800/765/400/220/132/66kV Transmission
line. (whenever applicable & covered under BPS)
(x) Stringing of Power line crossing section under Live Line Condition (where ever
applicable & covered under BPS);
(xi) Painting of towers & supply and erection of span markers, obstruction lights
(wherever applicable) for aviation requirements (as required)
(xii) Testing and commissioning of the erected transmission lines.
(xiii) Other items not specifically mentioned in this Specification and/or BPS but are
required for the successful commissioning of the transmission line, unless
specifically excluded in the Specification.
1.1.2.1 The drawings for all type of foundations for the towers shall be provided by the by
Employer to the Contractor. During execution of the project, if any specific designs
viz. raised chimney foundations, other type foundation work etc. are required as per
site conditions, Design Drawing shall be provided by the Employer.
1.1.2.2 (a) The provisional quantities of concrete, excavation volume & reinforcement steel
for foundation and other items are given in appropriate Schedule of Bid Proposal
Sheet (BPS) for respective packages. However, the work shall be executed as per
approved construction drawings.
(b) The various items of work are described very briefly in the appropriate Schedule
of BPS. The various items of the BPS shall be read in conjunction with the
corresponding sections in the Technical Specifications including amendments
and, additions, if any. The Bidder’s quoted rates shall be based on the
description of activities in the BPS as well as other necessary operations required
to complete the works detailed in these Technical Specifications.
(c) The Unit rates quoted shall include minor details which are obviously and fairly
intended, and which may not have been included in these documents but are
essential for the satisfactory completion of the various works.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 2 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 (d) The unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of all plant equipment, men, material
skilled and unskilled labour etc. essential for satisfactory completion of various
works.
(e) All measurements for payment shall be in S.I. units, lengths shall be measured in
meters corrected to two decimal places. Areas shall be computed in square
meters & volume in cubic meters, rounded off to two decimals.
1.1.2.3 The Bidder shall submit his offer taking into consideration that the foundation
designs/drawings shall be developed/ provided by Employer and design rights will be
strictly reserved with Employer. Bidder shall quote the unit rates for various items of
foundations as per units mentioned in appropriate schedule of (BPS). However,
payment of these items identified in the schedule of prices shall be made as follows:
TOWER & Foundation
Tower Erection items : On erection of respective complete tower
Foundation items : On completion of respective foundation in all respect
The payment to be made for foundations shall be worked out based on the unit rates
and approved quantities/volumes as per approved tower foundation drawings.
1.1.3 This specification also includes the supply of the following items, as detailed in the
specification.
(a) Earth wire & hardware fittings and all type of accessories for conductor and
earth wire.
(b) Insulator (Composite Long Rod)
(c) OPGW & associated fittings and accessories
Contractor shall clearly indicate in their offer, the sources from where they propose
to procure these materials in appropriate Schedule of BPS. The technical descriptions
of these items are given in relevant sections of this Volume.
1.1.4 The Contractor shall take delivery of the Employer’s supplied materials at the stores
established by the contractor in consultation with the Employer and ensure their
safe custody and shall install the same in the transmission lines as stipulated in this
specification.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 3 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 1.1.5 In case, supply by the Employer or other Supplier, the contractor shall take delivery,
carry out (unloading & stacking), ensure safe custody of materials at their stores
including insurance cover as required &install the same in the transmission lines as
stipulated in this specification.
1.1.6 The installation/stringing of OPGW cable along with associated fittings & accessories
shall be carried out by the contractor. The scope of installation/stringing shall
include splicing, termination, testing, demonstration for acceptance &
commissioning as well as documentation. Splicing is preferred to be carried out at
Tension towers locations. However, it shall be permitted at Suspension Tower
locations also as required due to site conditions. The installation/stringing and
splicing shall be carried out as per owner guidelines (provided as part of TS). The
FODP & Approach cable shall also be installed by the Contractor.

(Clause no. 1.1.6 to be inserted whenever OPGW, Approach Cable & FODP etc. is to
be used in the project whether supplied by owner or contractor.)

1.1.7 All the raw materials such as steel, zinc for galvanizing, reinforcement steel and
cement for tower foundation, coke and salt for tower earthing etc. bolts, nuts,
washers, step bolts, D-shackles, hangers, links, danger plates, phase plates , number
plates, Circuit Plates, aviation signals etc., required for erection work shall be
included in the Contractor’s scope of supply. Bidder shall indicate in the offer, the
sources from where they propose to procure the raw materials and the components.

1.1.8 Stringing

a) For Earthwire:

The entire stringing work of earth wire shall be carried out by standard
stringing practice

b) For OPGW:

The entire stringing work of OPGW shall be carried out by power operated
winch machines. No tractor shall be allowed for stringing of OPGW (Clause
applicable for the lines having OPGW).

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 4 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 *c) For transmission line with Single Conductor per phase:

The entire stringing work of conductor shall be carried out by standard

stringing practice. No tractor shall be allowed for final sagging. The Contractor
shall use power operated winch machines only.

*d) For transmission line with Bundle Conductor per phase:

No tractor shall be allowed for final sagging. For tower erection and stringing
work power Winch Machines required to be deployed at site.

To promote mechanization, for better safe working condition at site the

contractor shall mandatorily provide at site for each package (i) requisite
numbers (minimum two) of sagging bridges/working platform with pull lifts for
facilitating sagging & dead end jointing (ii) requisite numbers (minimum four) of
power operated winch machines for carrying out final sagging (iii) requisite
numbers (minimum four) ladders with suitable hooks and attachment
arrangement to facilitate worker movement on insulators strings and (iv)
adequate number of walkie-talkies. In case more number of sagging
bridges/working platform, power operated winch machines etc. are required for
stringing of transmission line in accordance with time schedule, the same shall be
provided by the Contractor. Further, use of tractor for final sagging shall not be
permitted. The Contractor shall use power operated hydraulic/motorized winch
machines only.
Power line crossing, river crossings, railway crossings, other single span sections
where deployment of tension stringing machine is not warranted and in hilly
terrain, thick forest or areas with site constraints, where deployment of tension
stringing machine is not feasible , manual stringing may be adopted after getting
approval of EMPLOYER’s site Engineer. The contractor shall deploy appropriate
tools / equipments / machinery to ensure that the stringing operation is carried
out without causing damage to conductor/earth wire/OPGW which are installed
at the prescribed sag-tension as per the approved stringing charts.
However, the Bidder having requisite experience may use helicopter for stringing.
The Bidder intending to use helicopter shall furnish detailed description of the
procedure, type & number of helicopter & accessories etc., to be deployed for
stringing operation.
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 5 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 The contractor may also deploy drones for stringing of pilot wires/ropes for pilot
wire, keeping in view site condition & feasibility.
The payment for stringing shall be done as per the unit rates of stringing under
the contract irrespective of the methodology adopted for stringing.

1.1.9 De-stringing/ Dismantling

1.1.9.1 The scope of works includes destringing of conductor, earthwire & OPGW, removal
of hardware fittings, insulators, conductor, earthwire & OPGW accessories, etc. and
dismantling of tower from some sections of existing line and transporting of
dismantled materials to designated POWERGRID stores. The Employer shall arrange
shut down of charged sections of existing transmission lines, if required, before
carrying out destringing & dismantling works as per program finalized in co-
ordination with site. Appropriate safety measures along with necessary safety tools
and equipments to carry out destringing and stringing operations under the above
conditions including mechanical/ structural safety of the towers shall be the
responsibility of the contractor. The entire quantity of dismantled line materials viz.
tower parts, conductor, earthwire, OPGW, hardware fittings, insulators and
conductor, earthwire & OPGW accessories removed from the existing line shall be
transported to the designated POWERGRID stores by the contractor at his own cost.
The Bidder shall submit his offer taking into consideration transportation cost of the
dismantled material.

1.1.9.2 The contractor shall inspect the affected stretch of transmission lines and shall
accordingly devise appropriate methodology/procedure of carrying out the de-
stringing/restringing works during detailed engineering & execution stage in
consultation with the site in-charge.

1.2 Details of Transmission Line Routes and Terrain

The detailed survey shall be carried out using Total stations along the approved
route alignment. As an alternative, the contractor may also use ALTM (Airborne
Laser Terrain Modeling) techniques of equal or better accuracy for the detailed
survey.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 6 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 Quantity of detailed survey including route alignment, profiling, tower spotting,
optimization of tower locations, soil resistivity measurement & geotechnical
investigation etc of lines have been indicated in the BPS.

1.2.1 Bidders may visit the line route to acquaint themselves with terrain conditions and
associated details of the proposed transmission lines. For this purpose they are
requested to contact the following address:

1.1.9 Bidders may visit the line route to acquaint themselves with terrain conditions and
associated details of the proposed transmission lines. For this purpose they are
requested to contact the following address:

Senior General Manager,

Power Grid Corporation of India Limited,
765/400/220kV Sub-Station,
12.6 KM Mile Stone, Shamshabad Road,
P.O. Shyamo,
Agra-283125
Mb: 7087404387

1.3 Location Details and Terminal Points –

1.3.1 The work involved in the portion of transmission lines namely
 400 kV S/C Agra- Ballabhgarh Transmission Line
 400 kV S/C Agra- Bassi Transmission Line
All above transmission line sections are passing through Plain area under Uttar
Pradesh State.
1.3.2 The Contractor shall have to construct these transmission lines completely in the
diverted portion. Stringing / De-stringing shall also be carried out in the entire
diverted portion.
1.4 Access to the Line and Right of Way
Right of way and way leave clearance shall be arranged by the Employer in
accordance with work schedules. Employer will secure way leave and Right of way in
the Forest area.
1.5 Contractor Execution Plan
After award of the contract, the contractor shall submit a detailed plan for resources
mobilization & execution of various activities under the project scope along with the L2
network. The detail should also cover the locations and size of stores to be established
by the contractor.
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 7 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 2.0 Qualification Requirement for Contractor’s Supplied Line Materials & Pile
foundation.
The Bidder should have assured access to supply the Insulator, Earth wire, Hardware
fittings and Conductor & Earth wire accessories and OPGW from Qualified
Manufacturers meeting the following minimum requirements and must demonstrate
that based on known commitments they will be available for use in the proposed
contract.
All materials shall be procured from the POWERGRID approved firms which meet the
respective qualifying requirements stipulated below. The contractor shall finalize
their sub-vendors/manufacturers for supply of various line materials from amongst
qualified firms within one month from date of NOA and submit the details in support
of their meeting the stipulated qualification requirements.
In case Contractor proposes to supply the line material(s) from a sub-
vendor/manufacturer which is not already approved by POWERGRID, the same may
be considered subject to following:-
i. The proposal shall be given by Contractor along with complete details in support of
suppliers’ meeting the stipulated qualification requirements including details of past
supplies, test certificates, performance certificates etc.
ii. POWERGRID may carryout assessment of the works of the proposed suppliers, if
required.
iii. The final approval of the supplier shall be subject to verification of QR data and
assessment of the supplier to the satisfaction of POWERGRID.
The review/verification of QR data by POWERGRID/assessment of supplier’s
works/approval of the proposed supplier shall not in any way limit Contractor’s
responsibility or dilute their obligation of timely completion of supplies/works. Any
delays, what-so-ever, shall be entirely to contractor’s account.
iv. Wherever the qualification requirement mentioned below stipulate requirement of
providing additional warranty, the requisite CPG shall be submitted to POWERGRID
regional HQ with intimation to Engg department for subsequent review & approval
of sub vendor drawings/documents

2.1 Earthwire (applicable in case supply of Earthwire is included in the scope)

The qualified manufacturer should have manufactured, tested and supplied at least
three hundred (300) kms. Of galvanized steel ground wire/ ACSR core wire of size
7/3.15mm or above.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 8 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 2.2 OPGW(applicable in case supply of OPGW is included in the scope)
2.2.1 TECHNICAL EXPERIENCE
(a) The OPGW manufacturer should be a “Local Supplier” as per latest DPIIT and DoT
notification.
(b)
(i) OPGW manufacturer must have manufactured, type tested (as per IEC or
equivalent standard) and supplied at least 100 Kms of OPGW during last seven
(7) years and the same must be in satisfactory operation# for at least two (2)
years on 66 kV or above transmission line(s) as on the date of NOA.
OR
(ii) OPGW manufacturer must have manufactured, type tested (as per IEC or
equivalent standard) and supplied at least 100 Kms of OPGW as on the date of
NOA. Further extended warranty of two (2) years over and above the warranty
period specified for OPGW shall be submitted.

(c) OPGW manufacturer established as Subsidiary/JVC/Group company, meeting the

requirement at (a) but not (b)(i) above can also be considered provided its
Parent/Principal company meets the requirement at (b)(i) above. Further the
following shall also be submitted by OPGW manufacturer:
(i) Performance guarantee for an amount of 10% of the cost of OPGW cable.
(ii) Valid collaboration agreement (between Parent/ Principal and OPGW
manufacturer) for technology transfer / license to design, manufacture, test and
supply OPGW in India.
Note 1: #satisfactory operation – means Certificate issued by the Employer certifying
the operation without any adverse remark.

2.2.2 For Live Line Installation (if applicable)

The agency must have installed at least 100 Kms of OPGW cable in live-line condition
on 66 kV or higher voltage transmission line(s) as on the date of NOA.
(This clause will be inserted if OPGW installation on existing line is covered under the
scope of work)
2.3 Composite Insulators
The Qualified Manufacturer shall be a manufacturer of Composite Insulators. The
Qualified Manufacturer’s experience should include the following:
2.3.1 The Qualified Manufacturer should have designed, manufactured, tested and
supplied minimum 2000 nos of 160kN or above rating Composite long rod insulators
for 345kV or above voltage transmission lines and the same should have been in
satisfactory operation$ for a minimum period of two years as on date of NOA.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 9 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 2.3.2 The Qualified manufacturer should also have successfully completed at least the
following tests on insulator units and insulator strings (of Composite long rod
insulators) as on date of NOA.

a. Tests on individual units of #70/90/120/160/210 KN or above rating as per

IEC 61109-1995 or IEC 61109-2008.

b. Following Type tests on insulator strings assembly for 345kV or above

Voltage transmission lines with 160 or above electromechanical strength
insulators:
- Power Frequency Voltage withstand test (Wet)
-Switching Surge Voltage Withstand test (Wet)
- Lightning Impulse Voltage Withstand test (Dry)
- Radio Interference Voltage Test (Dry)

c. Accelerated ageing test of 5000hrs as described in appendix-C of IEC 61109

or Test at Multiple stresses of 5000 hrs as described in Annex-B of IEC-
62217

2.3.3 In case of foreign manufacturer, he should have manufactured and supplied at least
1000 nos of 160kN or above electromechanical strength of composite long rod
insulators for 345 kV or above voltage in not more than two contracts to any other
country other than the home country of the manufacturer and the same should
have been in operation as on date of NOA.

2.3.4 In case of indigenous manufacturer not meeting the requirement stipulated in cl.
2.3.1 above, can also participate provided he meets the following requirements:-

(i) The Qualified Indigenous Manufacturer should have designed, manufactured,

tested and supplied minimum 150 nos. 160kN or above rating Composite long rod
insulators for 345kV or above voltage transmission lines / sub-stations and the
same should have been in satisfactory operation$ for a minimum period of two
years as on date of NOA.

(ii) The Qualified manufacturer shall meet the testing requirements as stipulated at
Clause 2.3.2 above.

(iii) If the Qualified manufacturer is not meeting the stipulated two years operational
experience requirements specified at 2.3.4.(i) above, the manufacturer shall
furnish extended warranty^^ of additional two years over and above the warranty
period specified under the package.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 10 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 $ Satisfactory operation under above clauses means certificate issued by the Employer certifying the
operation without adverse remark.

2.3.5 The proposed manufacturer can also be a qualified licensee of a qualified

manufacturer meeting the above specified requirements at 2.3.1 & 2.3.2 and also
meeting the conditions stipulated at 2.7.

2.4 Conductor *(applicable in case supply of Conductor is included in the scope)

The Qualified Manufacturer shall be a manufacturer of Conductor. The qualified
manufacturer experience should include the following:
The qualified manufacturer should have manufactured, tested and supplied at least
One Thousand (1000)kms of Sixty one (61) or above strands ACSR/AAAC conductor
during last seven (7) years as on date of NOA.
2.4.1 The proposed manufacturer can also be a qualified licensee of a qualified
manufacturer meeting the above specified requirements at 2.4 and also meeting the
conditions stipulated at 2.7.
2.5 Hardware Fittings
The qualified manufacturer shall be a manufacturer of hardware fittings of similar
nature. The qualified manufacturer’s experience should include the following:

Applicable for 400kV Lines

(i) The qualified manufacturer should have designed, manufactured, tested and
supplied hardware fittings for at least 600 sets of tension strings and 1200
sets of suspension strings for 345kV or above voltage transmission line and
the same should have been in satisfactory operation$ for a minimum period
of two (2) years as on date of NOA ;
OR
(ii) (a) Alternatively, the qualified manufacturer should have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied hardware fittings for at least 600
sets of tension strings and 1200 sets of suspension strings for 220kV or
above voltage transmission line and the same should have been in
satisfactory operation$ for a minimum period of two (2) years as on as
on date of NOA; and

(b) The qualified manufacturer should also have successfully completed at

least the following type tests on tension & suspension strings for 345kV
or above application as on date of NOA:

Power Frequency Voltage withstand test (Wet)

Switching Surge Voltage Withstand test (Wet)***
Lightning Impulse Voltage Withstand test (Dry)
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 11 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 Corona & Radio Interference Voltage Test (Dry)***

(iii) In case of indigenous manufacturers, if the Qualified manufacturer is not

meeting the stipulated two years operational experience requirements
specified at (i) & (ii) (a) above, the contractor shall furnish extended
warranty^^ of additional two years over and above the warranty period
specified under the package.

(*** Not applicable for220kV, strike out if not applicable)

Note:^^ Additional extended warranty in terms of 10% CPG corresponding to cost of the item(s).

2.5.1 The proposed manufacturer can also be a qualified licensee of a qualified

manufacturer meeting the above specified requirements at 2.5 (i) or (ii) and also
meeting the conditions stipulated at 2.7.
2.6 Accessories for Conductor and Earth wire
2.6 (i) The qualified manufacturer shall be a manufacturer of accessories for conductor &
earthwire of similar nature. The qualified manufacturer experience should include
the following:

Applicable for 400kV Twin bundle conductor Lines

The qualified manufacturer should have designed, manufactured, tested and

supplied the item(s) of accessories for conductor & earth wire covered under the
package or item(s) of similar/comparable nature. For Bundle Spacer and Vibration
dampers, the experience should include at least the supply of 7,875 nos. of twin
bundle spacers and 5,850 nos. of vibration dampers for conductor and 1,950 nos. of
vibration dampers for earthwire for 220kV or above voltage transmission line and
the same should have been in satisfactory operation$ for a minimum period of two
(2) years as on date of NOA. (For accessories for galvanized steel Earthwire, the
requirement of voltage level shall not be applicable).

2.6 (ii) In case of indigenous manufacturers, if the Qualified manufacturer is not meeting the
stipulated two years operational experience requirements specified at (i) above, the
contractor shall furnish extended warranty# of additional two years over and above
the warranty^^ period specified under the package.

Note: ^^ Additional extended warranty in terms of 10% CPG corresponding to cost of the item(s).

2.6.1 The proposed manufacturer can also be a qualified licensee of a qualified

manufacturer meeting the above specified requirements at 2.6 (i) and also meeting
the conditions stipulated at 2.7.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 12 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 2.6.2 The manufacturer(s) meeting the above requirement for any individual item or items
shall be considered qualified for the respective item or items only.

2.7 Licensor-Licensee conditions:

(i) Manufacturer/licensees shall have adequate design infrastructure and
manufacturing facility and capacity and procedures including quality control.
(ii) A qualified Licensee of a qualified manufacturer shall comply with all of the
following requirements and furnish a joint undertaking by the licensor along with
the bid.
a) Any design undertaken by the licensee shall be approved by the licensor.
b) Manufacture by the licensee shall be done with the approval of the licensor
and Employer under a quality assurance programme approved and monitored
by the licensor.
c) Licensee must furnish back-up guarantee from the licensor for individual and
overall performance of all materials supplied under the contract.
d) Licensor must guarantee sequential and timely supply of materials and
submission of technical information and data as desired by the Employer so as
to meet the overall construction schedule and
e) The agreement between licensee and licensor (copy to be submitted along
with the undertaking as per, Proforma enclosed as Annexure–A to this
section) shall be valid for a period of at least five (5) years after the guarantee
period of equipment and materials under supply is over.
$ Satisfactory operation under above clauses means certificate issued by the Employer certifying the
operation without adverse remark.

3.0 Transmission towers and Line data

3.1 General Description of the Tower
3.1.1 The transmission towers are of self-supporting hot dip galvanized lattice steel type,
designed to carry the line conductors with necessary insulators, earth wire*,
OPGW*(If applicable)and all fittings under all loading conditions. Outline diagram of
towers are enclosed with the Specification.
3.1.2 The towers shall have mild steel or/and high tensile steel sections and shall be fully
galvanized as specified in relevant clauses in section-IV. Bolts and nuts with spring
washer are to be used for connections.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 13 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 3.1.3 The towers are of the following types:
A) Single Circuit
B) Double Circuit
C) Multi Circuit
D) Special towers.

3.2 Classification of Towers

3.2.1 The towers for 400kV Single Circuit & Double Circuit lines are classified as given
below:

Type of Deviation Typical Use

Tower Limit
A/DA/QA* 0 – 2 deg. To be used as tangent tower.
B/DB/QB* 0 deg. To be used as Section Tower.
B/DB/QB* 0 - 15 deg. a) Angle towers with tension Insulator string.
b) Also to be used for uplift force resulting from an
uplift span up to 200m under broken wire
conditions.
c) Also to be used for Anti Cascading Condition.
C/DC/QC* 0 deg. To be used as Section Tower.
C/DC/QC* 15 - 30 deg. a) Angle tower with tension insulator string.
b) Also to be used for uplift forces resulting from an
uplift span up to 200m under broken wire
condition.
c) Also to be used for anti-cascading condition.
D/DD/QD* 30 - 60 deg. a) Angle tower with tension insulator string.
b) Also to be used for uplift forces resulting from an
uplift span up to 300m under broken wire
condition.

c) Dead end with 0 deg to 15 deg deviation both on

line side and sub-station side (slack span)
D/DD/QD* 0 deg. a) Complete Dead end
b) For river crossing anchoring with longer wind span &

Note:
1. The above towers can also be used for longer span with smaller angle of
deviations without infringement of ground clearance.
2. The above table provides indicative classification of Towers. Tower spotting
data for various towers to be used in the transmission lines under the specific
package shall be given to the contractor during execution stage.
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 14 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 3.2.2 Transposition tower for Lines
For transposition of transmission line if required suitable tension type tower with
modifications shall be used for transposition of the line maintaining all the required
electrical clearances and shielding. Indicative sketches for single and double circuit
transposition towers are enclosed in drawing section of this specification.

Two numbers of transposition towers shall be required in a double circuit

transmission line and three number of transposition towers shall be required in a
single circuit transmission line having horizontal configuration of towers. Location of
transposition towers shall be selected by the contractor during detailed survey in
consultation with site in charge.

In case of the 765 kV S/C transmission line having delta configuration of towers, no
modification in the C type tower is required and transposition shall be carried by
using three pairs of C type towers in the line as shown in the sketch enclosed in
drawing section of this specification.

Single tension strings, Single suspension pilot strings and T-connectors/PG Clamp as
indicated in the sketches shall be used for maintaining the requisite electrical
clearances under normal and swing conditions.

3.2.3 Special Towers

The towers which will be specially designed for very long spans which cannot be
crossed by normal tower with extensions as given in cl.no.3.2.4 like Major River
crossings etc. shall be treated as special towers.

3.2.4 Extensions
3.2.4.1 The towers are generally designed so as to be suitable for-6.0/-4.5/-3.0/-
1.5/±0.0/+1.5/+3.0/+6.0/+7.5/+9.0/+18/+25/+30Mbody truncations/extensions/leg
extensions for maintaining adequate ground clearances without reducing the
specified factor of safety in any manner.
3.2.4.2 The provision for addition of 18/25/30M body extension to tower types A/DA,B/DB
and D/DD(as specified in tower spotting data given to the contractor during
execution stage) is also kept. For Power Line Crossing or any other obstacle crossing,
tower types A/DA, B/DB or D/DD can be used with 18/25 M extensions depending,
upon the merit of the prevailing site condition. The maximum reduced spans for
A/DA,B/DB and D/DD type towers shall be mentioned in the tower spotting data.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 15 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 3.2.4.3 The towers have been designed for providing unequal leg extensions. The details of
unequal leg extensions provided in the design shall be furnished to the contractor
during execution stage, so that proper optimization of benching / revetment
requirement can be done accordingly by the contractor. The towers are designed for
unequal leg extensions of -6.0 /-4.5 /-3.0 /-1.5 /±0.0 /+1.5 /+3.0 /+6.0 /+7.5/ +9.0M
generally with 3M maximum leg differential and in specific cases with 6m maximum
leg differential. In situations where difference in leg differential does not suit the
standard unequal leg extension provisions on the tower mentioned above, suitable
chimney extensions can be provided to reduce benching/revetment requirement.
3.2.4.4 All above extension provisions to towers and foundations shall be treated as part of
normal towers and foundations only.
3.2.4.5 The leg extensions, unequal leg extensions, chimney extensions and / or a
combination of these suitable for a tower location shall be selected on the basis of
techno-economic evaluation.
3.3 Span and clearances
Span and clearances given in following clauses are indicative. Span & Clearances to
be adopted for the specific package shall be as per Tower Spotting Data to be given
to the contractor during execution stage.

3.3.1 Normal Span

The normal ruling span of the line is *400m for 765/400KV/1200KV, *350m for
220KV and *320m for 132KV lines.

3.3.2 Wind Span

The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the support under
consideration. For normal horizontal spans this equals to normal ruling span.

3.3.3 Weight span

The weight span is the horizontal distance between the null points of the conductors
on the two spans adjacent to the tower. For spotting of structures, the span limits
are given in following table:

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 16 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 (FOR 765 KV LINE)**
TOWER TYPE NORMAL CONDITION BROKEN WIRE CONDITION
MAX. (m) MIN. (m) MAX. (m) MIN. (m)
DA 600 200 360 100
DB 600 0 360 -200
DC 600 0 360 -200
DD 600 0 360 -300

(FOR 400 KV LINE)

TOWER TYPE NORMAL CONDITION BROKEN WIRE CONDITION

MAX. (m) MIN. (m) MAX. (m) MIN. (m)
DA 600 200 360 100
DB 600 0 360 -200
DC 600 0 360 -200
DD 600 0 360 -300

(FOR 220 KV LINE)

TOWER TYPE NORMAL CONDITION BROKEN WIRE CONDITION

MAX. (m) MIN. (m) MAX. (m) MIN. (m)
DA 525 200 315 100
DB 525 0 315 -200
DC 525 0 315 -200
DD 525 0 315 -200

(FOR 132 KV LINE)

TOWER TYPE NORMAL CONDITION BROKEN WIRE CONDITION

MAX. (m) MIN. (m) MAX. (m) MIN. (m)
DA 500 270 300 100
DB 515 0 310 -200
DC 515 0 310 -200
DD 515 0 310 -300

3.3.4 In case at certain locations, actual spans are found to be exceeding the design spans
and cross-arms/other members of towers are required to be modified/reinforced,
the tower shall be modified/reinforced by the contractor based on drawings
supplied to the Contractor.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 17 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 3.4 Electrical Clearances

3.4.1 Ground Clearance

The minimum ground clearance from the bottom conductor shall not be less than
*15000mm for 765 KV, *18000mm for +/- 800kV HVDC, *12500mm for +/- 500kV
HVDC, *8840 mm for 400KV, *7015 mm for 220KV and *6100 mm for 132KV lines at
the maximum sag conditions i.e at max temperature as indicated in tower spotting
data and still air.

a) An allowance of 150mm shall be provided to account for errors in stringing.

b) Conductor creep shall be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a

temperature as mentioned in cl 3.7 of section IV of this specification.

3.5 Electrical System Data**

3.5.1 765 kV transmission line

Nominal Voltage kV 765

2. Maximum system voltage kV 800
3. BIL (Impulse) kV (Peak) 2400
4. Power frequency withstand voltage kV (rms) 830
(Wet)
5. Switching surge withstand voltage (Wet) kV (peak) 1550
6. Minimum Corona extinction voltage at kV (rms) 510(Min)
50 Hz AC system under dry condition phase
to earth.
7. Radio interference voltage at one MHz Micro Volts 1000
for phase to earth voltage of 510 kV (Max)
under dry condition.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 18 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 400 kV transmission line

1. Nominal Voltage kV 400

2. Maximum system voltage kV 420
3. BIL (Impulse) kV (Peak) 1550
4. Power frequency withstand voltage kV (rms) 680
(Wet)
5. Switching surge withstand voltage (Wet) kV (peak) 1050
6. Minimum Corona extinction voltage at kV (rms) 320
50 Hz AC system under dry condition phase to
earth.
7. Radio interference voltage at one MHz Micro Volts 1000
for phase to earth voltage of 305 kV (max)
under dry condition.

For 220 KV Transmission Line

1. Nominal Voltage kV 220

2. Maximum system voltage kV 245
3. BIL (Impulse) kV (Peak) 1050
4. Power frequency withstand voltage kV (rms) 460
(Wet)
5. Minimum Corona extinction voltage at kV (rms) 154(Min)
50 Hz AC system under dry condition phase
to earth.
6. Radio interference voltage at one MHz Micro Volts 1000 (Max)
for phase to earth voltage of 154 kV
under dry condition.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 19 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 For 132 KV Transmission Line
1. Nominal Voltage kV 132
2. Maximum system voltage kV 145
3. BIL (Impulse) kV (Peak) 650
4. Power frequency withstand voltage kV (rms) 275
(Wet)

4.0 Details of line Materials

4.1 Details of Conductor & Earthwire

For 765 kV Single/Double Circuit transmission line

Sl. Description Conductor Conductor Earthwire* OPGW*

No. (Single Ckt.) (Double Ckt.)
1. Type ACSR ‘BERSIMIS’ ACSR ‘ZEBRA’ 7/3.66mm GS
conductor conductor Earthwire
2. Stranding and wire
diameter
Aluminium / Al Alloy 42/4.57 54/3.18 -
Steel 7/2.54 7/3.18 7/3.66
3. Conductor per phase 4 6 NA Equivalent to
4. Spacing between 457 457 NA 7/3.66mm GS
conductor of same Earthwire
phase(sub conductor
spacing)(mm)
5. Overall Diameter 35.05 28.62 10.98
(mm)
6. Unit mass (kg/km) 2181 1621 583
7. Min. UTS (kN) 154 130 68.4
8. Configuration DELTA Vertical One/Two* One/Two*
continuously continuously
to run to run
horizontally horizontally on
on top of the top of the
towers and towers and
conductors. conductors.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 20 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
For 400 kV Single/Double Circuit transmission line
Sl. Description Conductor Earthwire* OPGW*
No.
1. Type ACSR ‘MOOSE’ 7/3.66mm GS
conductor Earthwire
2. Stranding and wire
diameter
Aluminium / Al Alloy 54/3.53 -
Steel 7/3.53 7/3.66
3. Conductor per phase 4 NA Equivalent to
4. Spacing between 457 NA 7/3.66mm GS
conductor of same Earthwire
phase(sub conductor
spacing)(mm)
5. Overall Diameter 31.77 10.98
(mm)
6. Unit mass (kg/km) 2004 583
7. Min. UTS (kN) 161.6 68.4
8. Configuration Vertical One/Two* One/Two*
continuously to run continuously to
horizontally on top run horizontally on
of the towers and top of the towers
conductors. and conductors.
For 220kV Double Circuit transmission lines
Sl. Description Conductor Earthwire OPGW
No.
1. Type ACSR ‘ZEBRA’ 7/3.15 mm GS
conductor Earthwire
2. Stranding and wire diameter
Aluminium / Al Alloy 54/3.18 -
Steel 7/3.18 7/3.15
3. Conductor per phase 1 NA Equivalent to 7/3.15
4. Spacing between conductor of NA NA mm GS Earthwire
same phase(sub conductor
spacing)(mm)
5. Overall Diameter (mm) 28.62 9.45
6. Unit mass (kg/km) 1621 428
7. Min. UTS (kN) 130 56
8. Configuration Vertical One continuously to One continuously to
run horizontally on run horizontally on
top of the towers and top of the towers
conductors. and conductors.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 21 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
For 132 kV Double Circuit transmission lines

Sl. Description Conductor Earthwire OPGW

No.
1. Type 7/3.15 mm GS
ACSR PANTHER
Earthwire
2. Stranding and wire
diameter
Aluminium / Al Alloy 30/3 -
Steel 7/3 7/3.15
3. Conductor per phase 1 NA Equivalent to
4. Spacing between NA NA 7/3.15 mm GS
conductor of same Earthwire
phase(sub conductor
spacing)(mm)
5. Overall Diameter 21 9.45
(mm)
6. Unit mass (kg/km) 974 428
7. Min. UTS (kN) 89.67 56
8. Configuration Vertical One continuously One continuously
to run to run
horizontally on horizontally on
top of the towers top of the towers
and conductors. and conductors.
Note :a) Conductor*/OPGW* to be supplied by the Employer b)*Steel Earthwireto be
supplied by the Contractor.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 22 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 4.2 Details of insulator strings with composite long rod insulators.
S.No Type of String *Size of Minimu No. of Electro- Mechanical

Composite m individual Mechanical Strength of

Insulator Creepage Units per Strength of Insulator String

(Core dia x Distance String Insulator along with

Nominal (mm) per (Nos.) Unit Hardware Fittings

length)(mm) unit (kN) (kN)

765kV S/C AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH QUAD BERSIMIS CONDUCTOR

1. Single ‘I’ suspension Pilot 20 x 2900 12400 1x2 120 120

2. Double ‘I’ suspension 20 x 2900 12400 2x2 120 240

3. Single ‘V’ suspension Pilot 20 x 2900 12400 2x2 120 120

4. Single ‘V’ suspension 24 x 2975 12400 2x2 210 210

5. Double ‘V’ suspension 24 x 2975 12400 2x 2 x 2 210 420

6. Quadruple Tension 24 x 2975 12400 4x2 210 840

S.No Type of String *Size of Minimum No. of Electro- Mechanical

Composite Creepage individua Mechanical Strength of

Insulator Distance l Units Strength of Insulator String

(Core dia x (mm) per per String Insulator along with

Nominal unit (Nos.) Unit Hardware

length) (kN) Fittings

(mm) (kN)

FOR 765 kV D/C AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH HEX ZEBRA CONDUCTOR

1. Double ‘I’ Suspension 24x2975 12400 2x2 160 2x160

2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 24x2975 12400 1x2 160 160

3. Quadruple Tension 24x2975 12400 4x2 210 4x210

FOR ±800kV HVDC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH HEX LAPWING CONDUCTOR

2 x 2 (V- 420 along one

portion) & limb of V-portion

1. Single ‘Y’ suspension 40 x 4560 16800 420
1 x 2 (II- and along II

portion) portion)

Triple Tension String

2. 40 x 4560 16800 3x3 420 1260

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 23 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 FOR 400kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH QUAD MOOSE CONDUCTOR

1. Double ‘I’ Suspension 20x3335 13020 2x1 120 2x120

2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

3. Single Tension 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

4. Quadruple Tension 24x3910 13020 4x1 160 4x160

FOR 400kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH TRIPLE SNOWBIRD CONDUCTOR

1. Double I suspension 20x3335 13020 2x1 120 2x120

2. Single I Suspension Pilot 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

3. Single Tension 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

4. Double Tension 24x3910 13020 2 x1 210 2 x210

FOR 400kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH TWIN MOOSE CONDUCTOR

1. Single ‘I’ Suspension 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 20x3335 13020 1x1 120 120

3. Double Tension 24x3910 13020 2x1 160 2x160

FOR 220 kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES

1. Single I Suspension ‘Pilot’ 20x2030 7595 1x1 70 70

2. Single I Suspension 20x2030 7595 1x1 70 70

3. Single Tension 20x2175 7595 1x1 120 120

4. Double Tension 20x2175 7595 2x1 120 2x 120

FOR 132 kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES

1. Single I Suspension 20x1305 4495 1x1 70 70

2. Single Tension 20x1450 4495 1x1 90 90

3. Double Tension 20x1450 4495 2x1 90 2x 90

Note: *The core dia of composite insulators mentioned at column No.3 is for indicative purpose. The
bidder shall offer composite long rod insulators of suitable core dia to meet specified E&M and
torsion strength requirements.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 24 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
4.3 Details of insulator strings with standard disc insulators.

Size and
E& M No of
Size of Designatio Creepage
Strength Standard
S.No Type of String Disc in n of pin distance of each
of each Insulator
mm ball shank disc (mm)
disc KN Disc
(mm)
765kV S/C AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH QUAD BERSIMIS CONDUCTOR
1. Single ‘I’ suspension Pilot 120 1x40 255 x 145 20 370

2. Double ‘I’ suspension 120 2x40 255 x 145 20 370

3. Single ‘V’ suspension Pilot 120 2x40 255 x 145 20 370

4. Single ‘V’ suspension 210 2x35 280 x 170 24 370

5. Double ‘V’ suspension 210 2x2x35 280 x 170 24 370

6. Quadruple Tension, 210 4x35 280 x 170 24 370

FOR 765 kV D/C AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH HEX ZEBRA CONDUCTOR
1. Double ‘I’ Suspension 160 2x35 280 x 170 20 370
2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 160 1x35 280 x 170 20 370
3. Quadruple Tension 210 4x35 280 x 170 24 370
4. Single Tension 160 1x35 280 x 170 20 370
FOR 400kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH QUAD MOOSE CONDUCTOR
255-280 x
1. Double ‘I’ Suspension 120 2x23 20 370
145
255-280 x
2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 120 1x23 20 370
145
255-280 x
3. Single Tension 120 1x24 20 370
145
4. Quadruple Tension 160 4x23 280 x 170 20 370
FOR 400kV AC TRANSMISSION LINES WITH TWIN MOOSE CONDUCTOR
255-280 x
1. Single ‘I’ Suspension 120 1x23 20 370
145
255-280 x
2. Single Suspension ‘Pilot’ 120 1x23 20 370
145
255-280 x
3. Single Tension 120 1x23 20 370
145
4. Double Tension 160 2x23 280 x 170 20 370

Note : a) Insulator* to be supplied by the Employer

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 25 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
5.0 Service Conditions:
Equipment/material to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under tropical conditions as specified below:
Maximum ambient temperature (Degree Celsius) : **50
Minimum ambient temperature (Degree Celsius) : **0
Relative humidity (% range) : 10-100
Wind zone (as per IS: 875) : 4
Maximum wind velocity (m/sec.) : 47 m/sec
Maximum altitude above mean sea level (Meters) : Up to 1000 m
Isoceraunic level (days/years) : 50
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
** If conditions are different for a project, project specific data is got to be added

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 26 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
ANNEXURE-A
Page 1 of 3
FORM OF JOINT UNDERTAKING BY THE LICENSOR
ALONGWITH THE LICENSEE

On Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate Value

THIS DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ..................... day of ................ Two Thousand ....................by
................... a Company incorporated under the laws of ........................ and having its Registered Office at
................................ (hereinafter called the "Licensor" which expression shall include its successors,
executors and permitted assigns) and .......................... a Company incorporated under the Companies
Act, 1956 having its Registered Office at ......................... (hereinafter called the "Licensee" which
expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) in favour of Power Grid
Corporation of India Ltd., Northern Region-III, Headquarter, 12, Rana Pratap Marg, Lucknow-226001 (UP)
(hereinafter called the "Employer" which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted
assigns).

WHEREAS the Employer invited Bids as per its Specification No. ....................... for the construction of
transmission line which inter alia include design, manufacture, testing, supply on Final Destination
delivery at site basis for Composite Insulator*, Conductor*, Hardware Fittings* and Accessories for
Conductor & Earthwire* for .................................... Transmission Lines.

AND WHEREAS Clause 2.0 (d) (ii) (e) of Section-I, Vol-II, forming part of the Bidding Document inter alia
stipulates that the Licensee along with its Licensor must fulfill the Qualifying Requirements and be
joinTransmission Liney and severally bound and responsible for the successful performance of the
equipment and shall be fully responsible for the design, manufacture, testing, supply and final
destination delivery at site basis in the event the Bid is accepted by the Employer resulting in a
"Contract".

AND WHEREAS ................................a company incorporated Companies Act 1956, having its Registered
Office at ..................................... (hereinafter called the "Bidder"/"Contractor" which expression shall
include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) the Bidder has submitted its Bid for the Employer
for ..................................... Transmission Line having Specification No. ................................... vide Proposal
No. ..................... dated ...................... based on the License of the Licensor.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 27 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 ANNEXURE-A

Page 2 of 3

NOW THEREFORE THIS UNDERTAKING WITNESSETH AS UNDER :

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Employer to the Bidder (hereinafter referred to as
the "Contract") we, the Licensor and the Licensee do hereby declare that we shall be join
Transmission Liney and severally bound unto the Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd.
(Employer)/the Bidder for the successful performance of the equipment and shall be fully
responsible for the design, manufacture, testing, supply and final destination delivery at site basis
and successful performance of equipment in accordance with the Contract specifications.

2.0 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed of
Undertaking the Licensor in particular hereby agrees to depute their technical experts to the
Licensee's works as considered necessary by the Employer, Bidder and the Licensor to ensure
proper design, manufacture, Quality Management, testing, supply on final destination delivery at
site basis and successful performance of the equipment in accordance with Contract Specifications
and if necessary the Licensor shall advise the Licensee suitable modifications of the designs and
implement necessary corrective measures to discharge the obligations under the Contract.

3.0 As a security, the Licensor shall apart from the Contractor's performance guarantee, furnish a
Performance Security from its Bank in favour of the Employer in a form acceptable to Employer.
The value of such guarantee shall be equal to 5% of the Contract Price of equipment/material
proposed to be manufactured and supplied by the Licensee under the contract awarded by the
Employer to the Contractor and it shall be part of guarantee towards the faithful
performance/compliance of this Deed of Undertaking in terms of the Contract. The Guarantee shall
be unconditional, irrevocable and valid for the entire period of the contract, namely till the end of
the warranty period of ...................... package under the Contract. The Bank Guarantee amount
shall be payable to the Employer on demand without any reservation or demur.

4.0 We, the Licensor undertakes to guarantee sequential and timely supply of equipments and
materials and submission of technical information and data as designed of the Employer so as to
meet the overall construction schedule.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 28 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 ANNEXURE-A
Page 3 of 3

5.0 We, the Licensor and the Licensee confirm that the License agreement shall be valid for a period of
at least five (5) years after the guarantee period of the equipment and materials to be supplied
under the Contract is over.

6.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be constructed and interpreted in accordance with the Laws of India
and the courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising under the
undertaking.
7.0 We the Licensor and the Licensee agree that this undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an
integral part of the Contract and further agree that this undertaking shall continue to be
enforceable till the Employer and the Bidder discharge it. It shall become operative from the
effective date of Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Licensor and the Licensee have through their authorized Representative
executed these presents and affixed Common Seals of their respective Companies, on the day,
month and year first above mentioned.
WITNESS FOR LICENSEE
1. ................................................. ................................................................
(Signatures) (Signature of Authorized Representative)

................................................ ................................................................
(Name in Block Letter) (Name)

................................................. Designation ...........................................

(Office Address) Common Seal of Company
WITNESS FOR LICENSOR
1. ................................................. ................................................................
(Signatures) (Signature of Authorized Representative)

................................................ ................................................................
(Name in Block Letter) (Name)

................................................. Designation ...........................................

(Office Address) Common Seal of Company
Note :(i) This deed of joint undertaking should be attested by Notary Public of the place of the respective
executants.
(ii) To be filled separately for each package.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 29 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
Annexure-B OPGW FORMS

FORM OF DEED OF JOINT UNDERTAKING TO BE EXECUTED BY THE BIDDER AND

THE PROMOTER OF THE GROUP COMPANY (WHEN THE GROUP COMPANY IS YET TO
BE INCORPORATED UNDER INDIAN COMPANIES ACT) OF THE BIDDER FOR SUPPLY
AT LEAST 25% OF OPGW MANUFACTURED IN THE SAID FACILITIES IN INDIA
[STIPULATED IN CLAUSE 1.1.1(a) (i) & (ii)OF QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

This DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ............ day of ................. Two Thousand ............ by
M/s................................................................, a Company incorporated under ......................... having
its Registered Office at ...................................................... hereinafter called the “Bidder” which
expression shall include its successors, administrators, executors and permitted assigns and
M/s. ……………………………………, a Company incorporated under
…………………………………….. having its Registered Office at .................................................
hereinafter called the “Promoter” which expression shall include its successors, administrators,
executors and permitted assigns, in favour of …….. (insert names of the Purchaser) …………….., a
Company incorporated under the Indian Companies Act of 1956 having its registered office at
…………….(insert registered address of the Purchaser)…………… (hereinafter called the
“Purchaser” which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns)

WHEREAS the “Purchaser” invited Bid as per its Specification No. ……………. for the execution
of …. (insert name of the package along with project name) ………………

AND WHEREAS Clause No. ………….., Section …………, of ………………, Vol.–… forming part
of the Bidding Documents inter-alia stipulates that the Bidder must fulfill the Qualifying
Requirements for the *…………………………… and be joinTransmission Liney and severally
bound and responsible along with the Group Company for the successful performance of the
*……………………….. offered in the event the Bid submitted by the Bidder is accepted by the
Purchaser resulting in a Contract.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser vide Proposal No.
………..….……. dated ………. based on the association of the Promoter of the Group Company
and confirmed that the Group Company shall be incorporated as per Indian Companies Act,
within six (06) months from the date of award.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder and the Promoter are required to joinTransmission Liney execute
and furnish an irrevocable Deed of Joint Undertaking and be joinTransmission Liney and
severally liable to the Purchaser for ensuring manufacturing facilities of OPGW Cable in India
(hereinafter called as the “Equipment”) such that the Equipment to be supplied by the Supplier
can be repaired and maintained without necessitating it to be taken outside the country and for
supply at least 25% of OPGW Cable from such works of Group Company to be set up in India.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 30 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser based on above stipulation
and has agreed to furnish this Deed of Undertaking to be enforceable in the event of the award
of the Contract by the Purchaser.

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Purchaser to the Bidder/Supplier

(hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”) we, the Bidder/Supplier and the Promoter do
hereby agree and undertake to provide requisite Manufacturing and testing facilities for
the Equipment, after sales service and supply of spare parts as per the terms of the
Contract.

2.0 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed
of Undertaking, the Bidder/Supplier hereby agrees to depute their technical experts from
time to time to the Group Company Works/ Purchaser’s Project site as mutually
considered necessary by the Purchaser, Bidder/Supplier and the Group Company to
ensure:

(i) A valid technology transfer agreement, including license to manufacture and

supply from India, between the Bidder / Supplier, the technology provider and the
Group Company covering the type, size and rating of the OPGW Cable specified,
valid minimum up to the end of the defect liability period of the contract. The
technology transfer agreement necessarily covers transfer of technological know-
how for OPGW Cable in the form of complete transfer of design dossier, design
software, drawings and documentation, quality system manuals and imparting
relevant training by the Bidder / Supplier to the personnel of the Group Company.
(ii) Design of the Equipments manufactured in India shall be identical to the design of
equipments to be manufactured and supplied by the Bidder/Supplier
(iii) Adequate up gradation of the testing facilities including quality systems at Indian
works
(iv) Training to staff of the Group Company and certification to its trained personnel for
carry out each activity
(v) Involvement and supervision during all phases of manufacturing by expert of
Bidder/Supplier for the OPGW Cable
(vi) MQP of Group Company shall be same as that of Bidder/Supplier
(vii) Source of raw material / major bought out components shall be same as that of
Bidder/Supplier
(viii) Timely supply on FOR destination delivery at site basis.
(ix) Supervision of unloading at site, storage, erection, testing & commissioning and
successful performance of the equipment in accordance with contract specifications
(x) If necessary the Bidder/Supplier shall advise the Group Company, suitable
modifications of designs and implement necessary corrective measures to discharge
the obligations under the Contract.
(xi) Warranty obligations as per GCC clause 22.1 of the biding documents for the
entire quantity to be supplied from the Group Company.

3.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws
of India and the Courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising
under the Undertaking.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 31 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
4.0 We, agree that this undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the
Contract.

5.0 We hereby confirm that the above undertaking has also been approved by our Board of
Directors and the Resolution passed by our Board(s) is attached with this undertaking.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bidder / Supplier and Promoter of the Group Company have
through their Authorized Representatives executed these presents and affixed Common seals of
their respective Companies on the day, month and year first above mentioned.

WITNESS [For Bidder]

Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized
Name ……………………….. representative)

Office Address ………………. Name ……………………..

Common Seal of Company

…...…………….

WITNESS [For Promoter of the Group Company]

Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized
Name ……………………….. representative)

Office Address ………………. Name ……………………..

Common Seal of Company

…...…………….

Note:
1. For the purpose of executing the Deed of Undertaking, the non-judicial stamp papers of
appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of executants.

2. The Undertaking shall be signed on all the pages by the authorized representative(s) of the
Bidder and Promoter of the Group Company and should invariably be witnessed.

3. The Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Bidder and Promoter of the Group
Company, as per the format, shall be attached with this Undertaking.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 32 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
4. This Deed of Undertaking duly attested by Notary Public of the place(s) of the respective
executant, shall be submitted along with the bid.

FORM OF DEED OF UNDERTAKING BY THE CONTRACTOR

[STIPULATED IN CLAUSE ………………………………………………………]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

(Declaration by Contractor regarding ……………………. OF GTR/Qualifying Requirements

for Indigenous manufacturer of OPGW)

THIS DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ……………. day of ………………….. Two Thousand and
………… by M/s. ……..……………., a Company incorporated under the laws of …………………. having
its Registered Office at …………………. (hereinafter called the “Contractor” which expression shall
include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) in favour of …….. (insert names of the
Employer) …………….., a Company incorporated under the Companies Act of1956 having its
registered office at …………….(insert registered address of the Employer)……………
(hereinafter called the “Employer” which expression shall include its successors, executors and
permitted assigns)

WHEREAS the “Employer” invited Bid as per its Specification No. ……………….. for the execution of
…………… (insert name of the package along with project name)…………………...

AND WHEREAS Clause No. ………….., Section …………, of ………………, Vol.–… forming part of the
Bid Documents inter-alia stipulates that the Contractor must fulfill the General Technical
Requirements/Qualifying Requirement for OPGW in the event of award/or post award stage and shall be
bound and responsible for the successful performance of OPGW offered in the event the Bid submitted by
the Contractor is accepted by the Employer resulting in a Contract.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder/Contractor has submitted its Bid to the Employer vide Proposal No.
………..….……. dated …………..

NOW THEREFORE THIS UNDERTAKING WITNESSETH as under:

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Employer to the Contractor (hereinafter
referred to as the “Contract”) we, the Contractor do hereby undertake that we shall be
bound unto the …… (insert name of the Employer) …………, for the successful performance
of OPGW and shall be fully responsible for the design, manufacture, testing, supply on
FOR destination delivery at site basis and unloading at site, storage, erection, testing &
commissioning and successful performance of OPGW in accordance with the Contract
Specifications.

2.0 We confirm 3 (three) years Warranty obligations for the entire quantity to be supplied
under this contract.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 33 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 3.0 We, the Contractor agree that this Undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an
integral part of the Contract and further agree that this Undertaking shall continue to be
enforceable till the Employer discharges it. It shall become operative from the effective
date of Contract.

4.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws
of India and the Courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising
under the Undertaking.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Contractor have through their Authorised Representatives executed these
presents and affixed Common seals of their respective Companies, on the day, month and year first above
mentioned.

WITNESS (For Contractor)

Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized representative)

Name ………………………..
Name ……………………..

Office Address ……………….

Common Seal of Company …...…………….

WITNESS WITNESS

Signature ……………………. Signature …………………….

Name ………………………… Name …………………………

Office Address ………………. Office Address ……………….

Note:
1. For the purpose of executing the Deed of Undertaking, the non-judicial stamp papers of
appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of executants parties.
2. The Undertaking shall be signed on all the pages by the authorized representatives of Contractor
should invariably be witnessed.
3. This Deed of Joint Undertaking attested by Notary Public of the place(s) of the respective
executant(s) or registered with the Indian Embassy/High Commission in that country shall be
submitted by the Contractor after finalization of vendor for OPGW as per TS in the event of award/
post award stage.
* Strike-off whichever is not applicable.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 34 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
FORM OF DEED OF UNDERTAKING TO BE EXECUTED BY THE BIDDER [WHERE THE
SUBSIDIARY COMPANY / JOINT VENTURE COMPANY IS TO BE INCORPORATED] FOR
SUPPLY AT LEAST 25% OF OPGW CABLEMANUFACTURED IN THE SAID FACILITIES
IN INDIA [STIPULATED IN CLAUSE 1.1.1(a) (i) & (ii)OF QUALIFICATION
REQUIREMENT]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

This DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ............ day of ................. Two Thousand ............ by
M/s................................................................, a Company incorporated under ......................... having
its Registered Office at ...................................................... hereinafter called the “Bidder” which
expression shall include its successors, administrators, executors and permitted assigns, in
favour of …….. (insert name of the Purchaser) …………….., a Company incorporated under the
Indian Companies Act of 1956 having its registered office at …………….(insert registered address
of the Purchaser)…………… (hereinafter called the “Purchaser” which expression shall include its
successors, executors and permitted assigns)

WHEREAS the “Purchaser” invited Bid as per its Specification No. ……………. for the execution
of …. (insert name of the package along with project name) ………………

AND WHEREAS Clause No. ………….., Section …………, of ………………, Vol.–… forming part
of the Bidding Documents inter-alia stipulates that the Bidder must fulfill the Qualifying
Requirements for the *…………………………… and be joinTransmission Liney and severally
bound and responsible along with the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company for the
successful performance of the *……………………….. offered in the event the Bid submitted by
the Bidder is accepted by the Purchaser resulting in a Contract.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser vide Proposal No.
………..….……. dated ………. and confirmed that the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture
Company shall be incorporated as per Indian Companies Act, within six (06) months from the
date of award.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder and the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company are
required to joinTransmission Liney execute and furnish an irrevocable Deed of Joint
Undertaking and be joinTransmission Liney and severally liable to the Purchaser for ensuring
supply at least 25% of OPGW Cable manufactured in the said facilities in India (hereinafter
called as the “Equipment”) such that the Equipment to be supplied by the Supplier can be
repaired and maintained without necessitating it to be taken outside the country and for supply
at least 25% of OPGW Cable from such works of Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company
to be set up in India.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser based on above stipulation
and has agreed to furnish this Deed of Undertaking to be enforceable in the event of the award
of the Contract by the Purchaser.

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Purchaser to the Bidder/Supplier

(hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”) we, the Bidder/Supplier do hereby agree and

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 35 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 undertake to provide requisite Manufacturing and testing facilities for the Equipment,
after sales service and supply of spare parts as per the terms of the Contract.

2.0 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed
of Undertaking, the Bidder/Supplier hereby agrees to depute their technical experts from
time to time to the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company Works/ Purchaser’s
Project site as mutually considered necessary by the Purchaser, Bidder/Supplier and the
Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company to ensure:

(i) A valid technology transfer agreement, including license to manufacture and

supply from India, between the Bidder / Supplier, the technology provider and the
Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company covering the type, size and rating of
the OPGW Cable specified, valid minimum up to the end of the defect liability
period of the contract. The technology transfer agreement necessarily covers
transfer of technological know-how for OPGW Cable in the form of complete
transfer of design dossier, design software, drawings and documentation, quality
system manuals and imparting relevant training by the Bidder / Supplier to the
personnel of the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture Company.
(ii) Design of the Equipments manufactured in India shall be identical to the design of
equipments to be manufactured and supplied by the Bidder/Supplier
(iii) Adequate up gradation of the testing facilities including quality systems at Indian
works
(iv) Training to staff of the Group Company and certification to its trained personnel for
carry out each activity
(v) Involvement and supervision during all phases of manufacturing by expert of
Bidder/Supplier for the OPGW Cable
(vi) MQP of Group Company shall be same as that of Bidder/Supplier
(vii) Source of raw material / major bought out components shall be same as that of
Bidder/Supplier
(viii) Timely supply on FOR destination delivery at site basis.
(ix) Supervision of unloading at site, storage, erection, testing & commissioning and
successful performance of the equipment in accordance with contract specifications
(x) If necessary the Bidder/Supplier shall advise the Subsidiary Company / Joint
Venture Company, suitable modifications of designs and implement necessary
corrective measures to discharge the obligations under the Contract.
(xi) Warranty obligations as per GCC clause 22.1 of the biding documents for the
entire quantity to be supplied from the Subsidiary Company / Joint Venture
Company.

3.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws
of India and the Courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising
under the Undertaking.

4.0 We, agree that this undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the
Contract.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 36 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
5.0 We hereby confirm that the above undertaking has also been approved by our Board of
Directors and the Resolution passed by our Board(s) is attached with this undertaking.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bidder / Supplier have through their Authorized Representatives
executed these presents and affixed Common seals of their respective Companies on the day,
month and year first above mentioned.

WITNESS [For Bidder]

Signature ……………………. (Signature of the authorized
Name ……………………….. representative)
Office Address ………………. Name ……………………..
Common Seal of Company
…...…………….

WITNESS
Signature …………………….
Name ………………………..
Office Address ……………….

Note:
1. For the purpose of executing the Deed of Undertaking, the non-judicial stamp papers of
appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of executants.

2. The Undertaking shall be signed on all the pages by the authorized representative(s) of the
Bidder and should invariably be witnessed.

3. The Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Bidder, as per the format, shall be attached
with this Undertaking.

4. This Deed of Undertaking duly attested by Notary Public of the place(s) of the respective
executants, shall be submitted along with the bid.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 37 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE FOR CONTRACT PERFORMANCE

(TO BE SUBMITTED BY THE COLLABORATOR / PARENT COMPANY OF INDIGENOUS

MANUFACTURER OF OPGW)

[STIPULATED IN CLAUSE …………………………………………………]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

Bank Guarantee No. …………………… Date...................

Contract No.....................................

…………..[Name of Contract]…………………….

To: [Name and address of the Employer]

Dear Ladies and/or GenTransmission Lineemen,

We refer to the Contract ("the Contract") signed on ..............(insert date of the Contract)….....
between you and M/s…………………….............. (Name of Contractor) .................., having its
Principal place of business at ………....(Address of Contractor) ............................... and Registered
Office at ………....(Registered address of Contractor) ...................................................... ("the
Contractor") concerning …….................….. (Indicate brief scope of work) ............................... for the
complete execution of the …… (insert name of Package along with name of the Project)……..

Whereas, the Contractor has agreed to supply the OPGW Manufactured by M/s
....................................................(the Manufacturer), Having its Principal place of business and
Registered office at ………………………(Herein after Referred to as the ‘Manufacturer’ ) in
collaboration with (the manufactures) M/s. ................. (Name of Collaborator) .................., having
its Principal place of business at ………....(Address of Collaborator) ............................... and
Registered Office at ………....(Registered address of Collaborator) .................................... (hereinafter
referred to as the “Collaborator”), as a pre-requisite for qualification of the
Contractor/Manufacturer and have submitted a deed of joint undertaking declaring that they
are joinTransmission Liney and severally bound and responsible for the successful performance
of the said equipment in accordance with the Contract Specifications and that the Collaborator
having agreed to furnish a Contract Performance Guarantee for the faithful
performance/compliance of the Deed of Undertaking equivalent to (10%) ten per cent of the Ex-
works cost of OPGW to be supplied by the Manufacturer under the Contract during finalization
of OPGW Vendor in the event of award/ post award stage, in addition to Contract Performance
Guarantee equivalent to 10% (ten per cent) of the value of the Contract to be provided by the
Contractor for the faithful performance of the entire Contract.

By this letter we, the undersigned, ………(insert name & address of the issuing bank) ………, a Bank
(or Company) organized under the laws of .................................... and having its Registered/Head
Office at …..…….(insert address of registered office of the bank)……..... do hereby irrevocably
guarantee payment to you up to ………………………….. i.e., ten percent (10%) of the Ex-works

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 38 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
cost of OPGW to be supplied by the Manufacturer under the Contract until ninety (90) days
beyond the Defect Liability Period i.e., up to and inclusive of ……………. (dd/mm/yy).

We undertake to make payment under this Letter of Guarantee upon receipt by us of your first
written demand signed by your duly authorized officer declaring the
Contractor/Manufacturer/Collaborator to be in default under the Contract and without cavil or
argument any sum or sums within the above named limits, without your need to prove or show
grounds or reasons for your demand and without the right of the
Contractor/Manufacturer/Collaborator to dispute or question such demand.

Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall be to pay to you whichever is the lesser of the
sum so requested or the amount then guaranteed hereunder in respect of any demand duly
made hereunder prior to expiry of the Letter of Guarantee, without being entiTransmission
Lineed to inquire whether or not this payment is lawfully demanded.

This letter of Guarantee shall remain in full force and shall be valid from the date of issue until
ninety (90) days beyond the Defect Liability Period of the said equipment i.e. up to and inclusive
of ……………. (dd/mm/yy) and shall be extended from time to time for such period (not
exceeding one year), as may be desired by M/s. …………… on whose behalf this Letter of
Guarantee has been given.

Except for the documents herein specified, no other documents or other action shall be required,
notwithstanding any applicable law or regulation.

Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall become null and void immediately upon its
expiry, whether it is returned or not, and no claim may be made hereunder after such expiry or
after the aggregate of the sums paid by us to you up shall equal the sums guaranteed hereunder,
whichever is the earlier.

All notices to be given under shall be given by registered (airmail) posts to the addressee at the
address herein set out or as otherwise advised by and between the parties hereto.

We hereby agree that any part of the Contract may be amended, renewed, extended, modified,
compromised, released or discharged by mutual agreement between you and the Collaborator,
and this security may be exchanged or surrendered without in any way impairing or affecting
our liabilities hereunder without notices to us and without the necessity for any additional
endorsement, consent or guarantee by us, provided, however, that the sum guaranteed shall not
be increased or decreased.

No action, event or condition which by any applicable law should operate to discharge us from
liability hereunder shall have any effect and we hereby waive any right we may have to apply
such law so that in all respects our liability hereunder shall be irrevocable and, except as stated
herein, unconditional in all respects.

For and on behalf of the Bank

[Signature of the authorized signatory(ies)]

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 39 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 Signature_______________________

Name_______________________

Designation_______________________

POA Number_______________________

Contact Number(s): Tel.______________Mobile______________

Fax Number_______________________

email ____________________________

Common Seal of the Bank______________________

Witness:

Signature_______________________

Name_______________________

Address______________________________

Contact Number(s): Tel.______________Mobile______________

email ____________________________
Note :
1. For the purpose of executing the Bank Guarantee, the non-judicial stamp papers of appropriate
value shall be purchased in the name of Bank who issues the ‘Bank Guarantee’.
2. The Bank Guarantee shall be signed on all the pages by the Bank Authorities indicating their POA
nos. and should invariably be witnessed.
3. In case the bid is submitted by a Collaborator/Parent Company, either individually or as a partner
of Joint Venture, the additional performance guarantee of 10% shall not be applicable.
4. The Bank Guarantee should be in accordance with the Performa as provided. However, in case the
issuing bank insists for additional paragraph for limitation of liability, the following may be added
at the end of the Performa of the Bank Guarantee [i.e., end paragraph of the Bank Guarantee preceding
the signature(s) of the issuing authority(ies) of the Bank Guarantee]:

Quote

“Notwithstanding anything contained herein:

1. Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed _________ (value in
figures)____________ [_____________________ (value in words)____________].

2. This Bank Guarantee shall be valid upto________(validity date)__________.

3. We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount or any part thereof under this Bank
Guarantee only & only if we receive a written claim or demand on or before ________
(validity date) __________.”
Unquote

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 40 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 FORM OF JOINT DEED OF UNDERTAKING BY THE COLLABORATOR/ PARENT COMPANY
ALONGWITH THE BIDDER/MANUFACTURER

[In line with Clause ………………… : Qualifying Requirements for Indigenous manufacturer of OPGW
of Section-I: Technical Specifications, Volume-II (Applicable for OPGW to be supplied by Indigenous
manufacturer )]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

THIS DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ……………. day of ………………….. Two

Thousand and ………… by M/s. ……….…………….., a Company incorporated under the laws
of …………………… and having its Registered Office at …………………………….. (hereinafter
called the “Collaborator” which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted
assigns), and M/s. ……..……………., a Company incorporated under the laws of
…………………. having its Registered Office at …………………. (hereinafter called the
“Manufacturer” which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns )
and Ms/. ……………….., a Company incorporated under the laws of …………………. having its
Registered Office at ………………….. (hereinafter called the “Bidder/Contractor” which
expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) in favour of ……..
(insert names of the Employer) …………….., a Company incorporated under the Companies Act
of1956 having its registered office at …………….(insert registered address of the
Employer)…………… (hereinafter called the “Employer” which expression shall include its
successors, executors and permitted assigns)

WHEREAS the “Employer” invited Bid as per its Specification No. .……………….. for the
execution of ..…………… (insert name of the package along with project name)…………………....

AND WHEREAS Clause No. ………….., Section …………, of ………………, Vol.–… forming
part of the Bid Documents inter-alia stipulates that the Contractor and Manufacturer along with
its Collaborator must fulfill the Qualifying Requirements for OPGW and be joinTransmission
Liney and severally bound and responsible for the successful performance of OPGW offered in
the event the proposal for supply of OPGW from the Manufacturer submitted by the Contractor
is accepted by the Employer.

AND WHEREAS the Contractor has submitted its proposal to the Employer vide Proposal No.
………..….……. dated ………. for supply of OPGW from the Manufacturer based on the
collaboration/association of the Collaborator with the Bidder/Manufacturer.

NOW THEREFORE THIS UNDERTAKING WITNESSETH as under:

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Employer to the Contractor(hereinafter

referred to as the “Contract”) we, the Collaborator and the Contractor and the
Manufacturer do hereby declare that we shall be joinTransmission Liney and severally
bound unto the …… (insert name of the Employer) …………, for the successful performance
of OPGW and shall be fully responsible for the design, manufacture, testing, supply on
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 41 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 FOR destination delivery at site basis and supervision of unloading at site, storage,
erection, testing & commissioning and successful performance of OPGW in accordance
with the Contract Specifications.

2.0 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed
of Undertaking, the Collaborator in particular hereby agrees to depute their technical
experts from time to time to the Contractor’s/Indian Manufacturer’s Works/Employer’s
Project site as mutually considered necessary by the Employer, Contractor, Manufacturer
and the Collaborator to ensure proper design, engineering, manufacture, testing, supply
on FOR destination delivery at site basis and supervision of unloading at site, storage,
erection, testing & commissioning and successful performance of the equipment in
accordance with Contract Specifications and if necessary, the Collaborator shall advise
the Indian Manufacturer /Contractor suitable modifications of designs, manufacturing
process and implement necessary corrective measures to discharge the obligations under
the contract.

2.1 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed
of Undertaking, the Collaborator/Parent Company in particular hereby agrees to depute
their technical experts from time to time to the Contractor’s/Indian Manufacturer’s
Works / Employer’s Project site as mutually considered necessary by the Employer,
Contractor, Manufacturer and the Collaborator/Parent Company to ensure the warranty
obligations for Three (3) years for the entire quantity to be supplied from the
Contractor/Manufacturer.

3.0 As a security, Collaborator shall apart from the Bidder’s performance guarantee, furnish
additional Contract Performance Guarantee from its Bank in favour of the Employer in a
form acceptable to the Employer. The value of such guarantee shall be equivalent to 10%
of the Ex works cost of OPGW as identified in the Contract awarded by the Employer to
the Contractor. The guarantee shall be unconditional, irrevocable and valid for the entire
period of the Contract, and till the end of the Defect Liability Period of
……………………………. under the Contract. The Bank Guarantee amount shall be
payable to the Employer on demand without any reservation or demur.

4.0 We, the Collaborator and Contractor and/or Manufacturer agree that this Undertaking
shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the Contract and further agree that
this Undertaking shall continue to be enforceable till the Employer discharges it. It shall
become operative from the effective date of Contract.

5.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws
of India and the Courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction to adjudicate any
dispute arising under or in connection with this agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Collaborator, the Manufacturer and the Contractor have through
their Authorized Representatives executed these presents and affixed Common seals of their
respective Companies, on the day, month and year first above mentioned.
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 42 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 (For Collaborator)

(Signature of the authorized representative)

WITNESS
Name ……………………..
Signature …………………….
Common Seal of Company …...…………….
Name ………………………..

Office Address ……………….

WITNESS (For Contractor)

Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized representative)

Name ………………………..
Name ……………………..

Office Address ……………….

Common Seal of Company …...……………

WITNESS (For Manufacturer)

Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized representative)

Name ………………………..
Name ……………………..

Office Address ……………….

Common Seal of Company …...……………

Note:
1. For the purpose of executing the Deed of Joint Undertaking, the non-judicial stamp papers of
appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of executants parties.

2. The Undertaking shall be signed on all the pages by the authorized representatives of each of the
partners and should invariably be witnessed.

3. This Deed of Joint Undertaking duly certified by the Company Secretary shall be submitted along
with the bid. Further, the Deed of Joint Undertaking attested by Notary Public of the place(s) of the
respective executants(s) or registered with the Indian Embassy/High Commission in that country
shall be submitted by the bidder within ten (10) days from the date of intimation of post-bid
discussion.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 43 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 FORM OF DEED OF JOINT UNDERTAKING TO BE EXECUTED BY THE BIDDER /
SUPPLIER AND THE SUBSIDIARY COMPANY/JOINT VENTURE COMPANY/GROUP
COMPANY (ALREADY INCORPORATED / AFTER INCORPORATION) OF THE BIDDER
/ SUPPLIER FOR SUPPLY AT LEAST 25% OF OPGW CABLE MANUFACTURINED IN
THE SAID FACILITIES IN INDIA [STIPULATED IN CLAUSE 1.1.1(a) (i) & (ii)OF
QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENT]

(ON NON-JUDICIAL STAMP PAPER OF APPROPRIATE VALUE)

This DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed this ............ day of ................. Two Thousand ............ by
M/s................................................................, a Company incorporated under ......................... having
its Registered Office at ...................................................... hereinafter called the “Bidder/Supplier”
which expression shall include its successors, administrators, executors and permitted assigns
and M/s. ……………………………………, registered under the Indian Companies Act of 1956 or
2013, as the case may be, and having its Registered Office at .................................................
hereinafter called the “Subsidiary Company/Group Company /Joint Venture Company (JVC)”
which expression shall include its successors, administrators, executors and permitted assigns,
in favour of …….. (insert names of the Purchaser) …………….., a Company incorporated under the
Indian Companies Act of 1956 having its registered office at …………….(insert registered address
of the Purchaser)…………… (hereinafter called the “Purchaser” which expression shall include its
successors, executors and permitted assigns)

WHEREAS the “Purchaser” invited Bid as per its Specification No. ……………. for the execution
of …. (insert name of the package alongwith project name) ………………

AND WHEREAS Clause No. ………….., Section …………, of ………………, Vol.–… forming part
of the Bidding Documents inter-alia stipulates that the Bidder/Supplier along with the
Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/Group Company must fulfill the Qualifying
Requirements for the *…………………………… and be joinTransmission Liney and severally
bound and responsible for the successful performance of the *……………………….. offered in
the event the Bid submitted by the Bidder is accepted by the Purchaser resulting in a Contract.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser vide Proposal No.
………..….……. dated ………. based on the association of the Subsidiary Company / Group
Company / Joint Venture Company and are required to joinTransmission Liney execute and
furnish an irrevocable Deed of Joint Undertaking and be joinTransmission Liney and severally
liable to the Purchaser for ensuring manufacturing facilities of OPGW Cable in India (hereinafter
called as the “Equipment”) such that the Equipment to be supplied by the Supplier can be
repaired and maintained without necessitating it to be taken outside the country and for supply
at least 25% of OPGW Cable from such works of Subsidiary Company / Group Company / Joint
Venture Company in India.

AND WHEREAS the Bidder has submitted its Bid to the Purchaser based on above stipulation
and has agreed to furnish this Deed of Undertaking to be enforceable in the event of the award
of the Contract by the Purchaser.

1.0 In consideration of the award of Contract by the Purchaser to the Bidder / Supplier
(hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”) we, the Bidder/Supplier and the Subsidiary
*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 44 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
 Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group Company do hereby agree and undertake to
provide requisite Manufacturing and testing facilities for the Equipment, after sales
service and supply of spare parts as per the terms of the Contract.

2.0 Without in any way affecting the generality and total responsibility in terms of this Deed
of Undertaking, the Bidder/Supplier hereby agrees to depute their technical experts from
time to time to the Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group Company
Works/ Purchaser’s Project site as mutually considered necessary by the Purchaser,
Bidder/Supplier and the Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group
Company to ensure:

(i) A valid technology transfer agreement, including license to manufacture and

supply from India, between the Bidder / Supplier, the technology provider and the
Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group Company covering the type,
size and rating of the OPGW Cable specified, valid minimum up to the end of the
defect liability period of the contract. The technology transfer agreement necessarily
covers transfer of technological know-how for OPGW Cable in the form of complete
transfer of design dossier, design software, drawings and documentation, quality
system manuals and imparting relevant training by the Bidder / Supplier to the
personnel of the Subsidiary Company / Group Company / Joint Venture
Company.
(ii) Design of the Equipments manufactured in India shall be identical to the design of
equipments to be manufactured and supplied by the Bidder/Supplier
(iii) Adequate up gradation of the testing facilities including quality systems at Indian
works
(iv) Training to staff of the Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group
Company and certification to its trained personnel for carry out each activity
(v) Involvement and supervision during all phases of manufacturing by expert of
Bidder/Supplier for the OPGW Cable.
(vi) MQP of Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/ Group Company shall be
same as that of Bidder/Supplier
(vii) Source of raw material / major bought out components shall be same as that of
Bidder/Supplier
(viii) Timely supply on FOR destination delivery at site basis.
(ix) Supervision of unloading at site, storage, erection, testing & commissioning and
successful performance of the equipment in accordance with contract specifications
(x) If necessary the Bidder/Supplier shall advise the Subsidiary Company/Joint
Venture Company/ Group Company, suitable modifications of designs and
implement necessary corrective measures to discharge the obligations under the
Contract.
(xi) Warranty obligations as per GCC clause 22.1of the biding documents for the entire
quantity to be supplied from the Subsidiary Company/Joint Venture Company/
Group Company.

3.0 This Deed of Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the laws
of India and the Courts in Lucknow shall have exclusive jurisdiction in all matters arising
under the Undertaking.

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 45 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
4.0 We, agree that this undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the
Contract.

5.0 We hereby confirm that the above undertaking has also been approved by our Board of
Directors and the Resolution passed by our Board(s) is attached with this undertaking.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Supplier and Subsidiary Company/Group Company/Joint
Venture Company have through their Authorized Representatives executed these presents and
affixed Common seals of their respective Companies on the day, month and year first above
mentioned.

WITNESS [For Bidder/Supplier]

Signature ……………………. (Signature of the authorized

representative)
Name ……………………….. Name ……………………..
Common Seal of Company
Office Address ………………. …...…………….

WITNESS [For Subsidiary Company/Group

Company/Joint Venture Company]
Signature …………………….
(Signature of the authorized
representative)
Name ………………………..
Name ……………………..
Common Seal of Company
Office Address ……………….
…...…………….

Note:
1. For the purpose of executing the Deed of Undertaking, the non-judicial stamp papers of
appropriate value shall be purchased in the name of executants.
2. The Undertaking shall be signed on all the pages by the authorized representative(s) of the
Bidder and the Subsidiary Company/Group Company/Joint Venture Company and
should invariably be witnessed.
3. The Resolution of the Board of Directors of the Bidder and the Subsidiary Company /
Group Company / Joint Venture Company, as per the format, shall be attached with this
Undertaking.
4. This Deed of Undertaking duly attested by Notary Public of the place(s) of the respective
executants, shall be submitted along with the bid, in case where the Subsidiary Company/Group
Company/Joint Venture Company is already incorporated under the Indian Companies Act,
and shall be submitted during execution of contract if the Subsidiary Company/Group
Company/Joint Venture Company is incorporated under the Indian Companies Act subsequent
to award of contract.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

*Strikeout whichever is not applicable **As per specific Line Page 46 of 46

SECTION - I, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

REVISION –6, March-2018 Only for 400kV S/C & D/C lines
SECTION-II
 SECTION-II

CONTENTS

Clause Description Page No.

1.0 General Technical Conditions 1
2.0 Employer’s Environment and Social Policy 16
and its Implementation
Annexure-I 18
Annexure-II 19
Annexure-III 20
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION-II

1.0 General Technical Conditions

1.1 General

The following provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical

specifications and requirements brought out herein. The contractor’s
submission shall be based on the use of materials complying fully with the
requirements specified herein.

1.2 Drawings

1.2.1 All relevant standard drawings for all the towers/stubs and their extensions
shall be furnished to the Contractor by the Employer which shall include
structural drawings/erection drawings and / or shop fabrication drawings,
Bill of Materials for all the towers and their extensions as well as
construction drawings for foundations.

1.2.2 The tower members can be directly fabricated from the structural/erection
drawings wherever the required fabrication details are provided on the
same or shop fabrication drawings. However, if the contractor is required to
prepare shop fabrication drawings, of their own, in addition to the
structural/ erection drawings with required fabrication details, they may
prepare the same without any additional financial implication to Employer.

1.2.3 Apart from the standard drawings mentioned above, some other drawings
and documents, such as BOM, Shop drawings, structural drawings for
towers/extensions may need to be developed based on single line diagram
given by the Employer, which are required for the project. These drawings,
BOM, shop sketches shall be developed by the Contractor. However, no
extra cost on this account shall be payable to the Contractor.

1.2.4 After development, these drawing shall be submitted to the Employer in

triplicate for approval. In ordinary circumstances, the contractor should
submit these drawings for approval within 15 days of receipt of the single
line drawing from the employer.

1.2.5 Such drawings/documents developed by the Contractor shall necessarily

have sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions,
material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component break-up
for packing and shipment, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions
required for installation and any other information specifically requested in
the specifications.

Page 1 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
1.2.6 Each drawing developed by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the
name of the Employer, the specification title, the specification number and
the name of the Project. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the
drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in
S.I. units.

1.2.7 The drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be reviewed by the

Employer as far as practicable within 15 days and shall be modified by the
Contractor if any modifications and/or corrections are required by the
Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such modifications and/or
corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays arising
out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not
alter the contract completion date.

1.2.8 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be in triplicate.
One print of such drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the
Employer marked “approved/approved with corrections”. The contractor
shall there upon furnish the Employer additional prints as may be required
along with soft copy (in PDF/AutoCAD format) of the drawings after
incorporating all corrections.

1.2.9 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with
the standard/approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted
without the written approval of the Employer, if so required.

1.2.10 All manufacturing, fabrication work under the scope of Contractor, prior to
the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The contractor
may incorporate any changes in the design, which are necessary to conform
to the provisions and intent of the contract and such changes will again be
subject to approval by the Employer.

1.2.11 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean
that the Employer is satisfied that:

(a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered by the
subject document (i.e. confirmation of progress of work).
(b) The Works appear to comply with requirements of Specifications.
In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply
compliance with all technical requirements or the absence of errors in such
documents.
If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract, then the
Contractor shall be responsible for consequences.
1.2.12 All drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD software version 2000 or later
only. Drawings, which are not compatible to AutoCAD software version 2000
Page 2 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 or later, shall not be accepted. After final approval all the drawings
(structural drawings, BOMs and shop sketches shall be submitted to the
Employer in CDs.

A copy of each drawing reviewed will be returned to the Contractor as

stipulated herein.
1.2.13 Copies of drawings returned to the Contractor will be in the form of a print
with the Employer’s marking, or a print made from a microfilm of the
marked up drawing.

1.2.14 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to
be approved by the Employer.

a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.

b) Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance
and tower locations (as applicable).
c) Tower schedule and foundation classification for individual tower
locations.
d) All drawings/documents which are developed by the contractor based
upon the single line drawing given by the Employer.
e) Soil Investigation report.
g) Tower footing earthing drawing.

i) Stringing procedure

j) Tower accessories drawings like danger plate, name plate etc.

k) Quality plans for fabrication and site activities including Quality

System.

l) Sub-vendors approval.

m) Line material drawings.

n) Type test report for line materials.

1.2.15 All rights of the design/drawing for all types of towers shall be strictly
reserved with the Employer only and any designs/drawings/data sheets
submitted by the contractor from time to time shall become the property of
the Employer. Under no circumstances, the Contractor shall be allowed to
user/offer above designs/drawings/data sheets to any other authority
without prior written permission of the Employer. Any deviation to above is
not acceptable and may be a cause for rejection of the bid.

Page 3 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
1.3 Design Improvements

1.3.1 The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification
and if the parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the
specification shall be modified accordingly.

1.4 Design Co-ordination

Wherever, the design is in the scope of Contractor, the Contractor shall be

responsible for the selection and design of appropriate material/item to
provide the best coordinated performance of the entire system. The basic
design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design of
various components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it
facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.

1.5 Design Review Meeting

The contractor may be called upon to attend design review meetings with
the Employer, and the consultants of the Employer during the period of
Contract. The contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at the
Corporate Office of the Employer or at mutually agreed venue as and when
required.

1.6 Engineering Data

1.6.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance

with the Schedule as specified in the Bidding Document. The review of these
data by the Employer will cover only general conformance of the data to the
specifications and not a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities and
details of the materials, or items indicated or the accuracy of the
information submitted. This review by the Employer shall not be considered
by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for
mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these
specifications.

1.6.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the
Employer shall form part of the contract document.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME

1.7.1 To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this
Contract, whether manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s
Works or at his Sub-Contractor’s premises or at the Employer’s site or at any
other place of Work as applicable, are in accordance with the specifications,
the Contractor shall ensure suitable quality assurance programme to
control such activities at all points necessary. A quality assurance

Page 4 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 programme of the Contractor shall be in line with ISO requirements & shall
generally cover the following :

a) The organisation structure for the management and implementation of

the proposed quality assurance programme.

b) System for Document and Data Control.

c) Qualification and Experience data of Bidder’s key personnel.

d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts, components and

selection of sub-Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source
inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material
purchases etc.

e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including

process controls, fabrication and assembly control.

f) System for Control of non-conforming products including deviation

dispositioning, if any and system for corrective and preventive actions
based on the feedback received from the Customers and also internally
documented system for Customer complaints.

g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.

h) System for Control of calibration of testing and measuring equipment and

the indication of calibration status on the instruments.

i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.

j) System of Internal Quality Audits, Management review and initiation of

corrective and Preventive actions based on the above.

k) System for authorising release of manufactured product to the Employer.

l) System for maintenance of records.

m)System for handling, storage and delivery.

n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedure adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to
each item of equipment furnished and /or service rendered.

o) System for various field activities i.e. unloading, receipt at site, proper
storage, erection, testing and commissioning of various equipment and
maintenance of records. In this regard, the Employer has already
Page 5 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 prepared Standard Field Quality Plan for transmission line/substation
equipments as applicable, Civil/erection Works which is required to be
followed for associated works.
The Employer or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to
carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and
procedure of the Contractor/his vendor’s quality management and control
activities.

1.7.1.1 Quality Assurance Documents

The Contractor shall ensure availability of the following Quality Assurance

Documents:

i) All Non-Destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld

repair procedure actually used during fabrication, and reports
including radiography interpretation reports.

ii) Welder and welding operator qualification certificates.

iii) Welder’s identification list, welding operator’s qualification procedure

and welding identification symbols.

iv) Raw Material test reports on components as specified by the

specification and in the quality plan.

v) The Manufacturing Quality Plan(MQP) indicating Customer Inspection

Points (CIPs) at various stages of manufacturing and methods used
to verify that the inspection and testing points in the quality plan
were performed satisfactorily.

vi) Factory test results for testing required as per applicable quality
plan/technical specifications/GTP/Drawings etc.

vii) Stress relief time temperature charts/oil impregnation time

temperature charts, wherever applicable.
1.7.2 Employer’s Supervision
1.7.2.1 To eliminate delays and avoid disputes and litigation to the Contract, all
matters and questions shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of
this document.
1.7.2.2 The manufacturing of the product shall be carried out in accordance with
the specifications. The scope of the duties of the Employer, pursuant to the
contract, will include but not be limited to the following:
Page 6 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 a) Interpretation of all the terms and conditions of these Documents and
Specifications.
b) Review and interpretation of all the Contractor's drawings, engineering
data etc.
c) Witness or authorize his representative to witness tests at the
manufacturer's works or at site, or at any place where work is
performed under the contract.
d) Inspect, accept or reject any equipment, material and work under the
Contract, in accordance with the Specifications.
e) Issue certificate of acceptance and/or progressive payment and final
payment certificate.
f) Review and suggest modification and improvement in completion
schedules from time to time, and
g) Supervise the Quality Assurance Programme implementation at all
stages of the works.

1.8 INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

1.8.1.1 Contractor shall procure bought out items from sub-vendors as per the list
in “Compendium of Vendors” available on POWERGRID web-site
www.powergridindia.com after ensuring compliance to the
requirements/conditions mentioned therein. Contractor shall explore first
the possibilities of procuring the bought out items from POWERGRID
approved existing vendors. In case of their unavailability / non-response,
Contractor may approach POWERGRID for additional sub-vendor approval.
In that case, the assessment report of proposed sub vendor by Contractor
along with the enclosures as per Annexure-I shall be submitted within 60
days of the award. The proposal shall be reviewed and approval will be
accorded based on the verification of the document submitted and/or after
the physical assessment of the works as the case may be. The physical
assessment conducted by POWERGRID, if required, shall be on chargeable
basis. Charges shall be as per the POWERGRID norms prevailing at that time,
which shall be intimated by POWERGRID separately. If proposal for sub-
vendor is submitted after 60 days, the Contractor’s proposal normally will
not be considered for current LOA. However, POWERGRID may process the
case for developing more vendors for referred items, if found relevant. In all
cases, It is the responsibility of the Contractor that Project activities do not
suffer on account of delay in approval/non approval of a new sub-vendor.

Page 7 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 The responsibility and the basis of inspection for various items & equipment
is placed at Annexure-II along with the requirement of MQP (Manufacturing
Quality Plan), ITP(Inspection & Test Plan), FAT(Factory Acceptance Test)
which should be valid & POWERGRID approved and Level of inspection
envisaged against each item.

Contractor shall ensure that order for items where MQP/ITP/FAT is required
will be placed only on vendors having valid MQP/ITP/FAT and where the
supplier’s MQP/ITP/FAT is either not valid or has not been approved by
POWERGRID, MQP shall be generally submitted as per POWERGRID format
before placing order. A Copy of MQP format is placed at Annexure – III.

Items not covered under MQP/ITP/FAT shall be offered for inspection as per
POWERGRID LOA/technical Specifications/ POWERGRID approved data
sheets/ POWERGRID approved drawings and relevant Indian / International
standards.

Inspection Levels: For implementation of projects in a time bound manner

and to avoid any delay in deputation of POWERGRID or its authorized
representative, involvement of POWERGRID for inspection of various items /
equipment will be based on the level below:

Level –I: Contractor to raise all inspection calls and review the report of
tests carried out by the manufacturer, on his own, as per applicable
standards/ POWERGRID specification, and submit to concerned POWERGRID
inspection office/Inspection Engineer. CIP/MICC will be issued by
POWERGRID based on review of test reports/certificates of manufacturers.

Level – II: Contractor to raise all inspection calls and carry out the inspection
on behalf of POWERGRID on the proposed date of inspection as per
applicable standards/specification. However, in case POWERGRID wishes to
associate itself during inspection, the same would be intimated to
Contractor and CIP/MICC will be issued by POWERGRID. Else, Contractor
would submit their test reports/certificates to POWERGRID. CIP/MICC will
be issued by POWERGRID based on review of test reports / certificates.

Level - III: Contractor to raise inspection calls for both, stage (as applicable)
& final inspection and carry out the stage inspections(if applicable) on
behalf of POWERGRID on the proposed date of inspection as per applicable
standards/specification. However, in case POWERGRID wishes to associate
itself during stage inspection, the same would be intimated to Contractor
and CIP will be issued by POWERGRID. Else, Contractor would submit the
test reports / certificates of stage inspection after their own review and CIP
will be issued by POWERGRID based on review of test reports / certificates.

Page 8 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 Final inspection will be carried out by POWERGRID and CIP/MICC will be
issued by POWERGRID.

Level – IV: Contractor to raise inspection calls for both, stage (as applicable)
& final inspections. POWERGRID will carry out the inspection for both stage
& final inspection as per applicable standards/specification and CIP/MICC
will be issued by POWERGRID.

1.8.1.2 Contractor shall ensure that to implement the above inspection levels,
particularly for the quality control and inspection at sub-vendor’s works,
they would depute sufficient qualified & experienced manpower in their
Quality Control and Inspection department. Further, to assure quality of
construction, Contractor shall have a separate workforce having appropriate
qualification & experience and deploy suitable tools and plant for
maintaining quality requirement during construction in line with applicable
Field Quality Plan (FQP).

1.8.1.3 The Employer, his duly authorised representative and/or outside

inspection agency acting on behalf of the Employer shall have at all
reasonable times access to the Contractor’s premises or Works and shall
have the power at all reasonable times to ensure that proper Quality
Management practices / norms are adhered to, inspect and examine the
materials & workmanship of the Works, to carry out Quality/Surveillance
Audit during manufacture or erection and if part of the Works is being
manufactured or assembled at other premises or works. The Contractor
shall obtain for the Employer and for his duly authorised representative
permission to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on
the Contractor’s own premises or works. The item/equipment, if found
unsatisfactory with respect to workmanship or material is liable to be
rejected. The observations for improvements during product/ process
inspection by POWERGRID shall be recorded in Quality Improvement
Register (available & maintained at works) for review & timely compliance
of observations.

1.8.1.4 Contractor shall submit inspection calls over internet through POWERGRID
website. The required vendor code and password to enable raising
inspection call will be furnished to the main Contractor with in 30 days of
award of contract on submission of documents by Contractor. After raising
the inspection calls, Contractor shall then proceed as per the message of
that particular call which is available on the message board.

1.8.1.5 The Employer reserves the right to witness any or all type, acceptance and
routine tests specified for which the Contractor shall give the
Employer/Inspector Twenty one (21) days written notice of any material
being ready for testing for each stage of testing as identified in the
Page 9 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 approved quality plan as customer inspection point(CIP) for indigenous
inspections. All inspection calls for overseas material shall be given at least
forty five (45) days in advance. Such tests shall be to the Contractor’s
account except for the expenses of the Inspection Engineer. The
Employer/inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is waived by Employer,
will attend such tests within Twenty one (21) days of the date of which
the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection, failing which
the Contractor may proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have
been made in the Inspector’s presence and he shall forthwith forward to
the Inspector three copies of tests, duly certified. Contractor shall
ensure, before giving notice for type test, that all drawings and quality
plans have been got approved. The equipment shall be dispatched to site
only after approval of Routine and Acceptance test results and Issuance of
Dispatch Clearance in writing by the Employer. CIP/Material Inspection
clearance certificate (MICC) shall be issued by the Employer after inspection
of the equipment or review of test reports as applicable. Employer may
waive off the presence of Employer’s inspecting engineer. In that case test
will be carried out as per approved QP and test certificate will be
furnished by the supplier for approval. CIP/MICC will be issued only after
review and approval of the test reports.

1.8.1.6 Contractor shall generally offer material for inspection as per supply bar
chart approved by POWERGRID and not before 30 days from schedule
indicated in the bar chart. In case Contractor offers material(s) for
inspection prior to 30 days from the scheduled date with necessary approval
of POWERGRID, POWERGRID shall inspect the material and issue CIP only.
However, in such an exceptional case, MICC shall be issued only as per
provision of original / revised approved supply schedule.

1.8.1.7 Contractor shall minimize the number of inspection calls by offering

optimum quantities in each inspection call at the respective manufacturer’s
works.

1.8.8.8 Contractor shall inspect the material themselves and only after they are
fully convinced about the Quality, they shall offer the material for
POWERGRID inspection and shall also ensure that relevant portion of
LOA/NOA, approved drawing and data sheets along with applicable Quality
Plans are available at the works of Contractor or their Sub-vendor before
the material is offered for inspection.

1.8.8.9 Contractor shall ensure that material which has been cleared for dispatch
after inspection will be dispatched within 30 days in case of domestic
supplies and within 60 days in case of Off-shore supplies from the date of
issuance of CIP. Material which is not dispatched within stipulated time as

Page 10 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 above will be reoffered for POWERGRID inspection or specific approval of
POWERGRID QA&I shall be obtained for delayed dispatch .

1.8.8.10 The Employer or IE shall give notice in writing to the Contractor, of any
objection either to conformance to any drawings or to any equipment and
workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract.
The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections and shall
either make the modifications that may be necessary to meet the said
objections or shall confirm in writing to the Employer/Inspection Engineer
giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to comply with
the Contract.

1.8.1.11 All Test Reports and documents to be submitted in English during final
inspection of equipment by POWERGRID or as and when required for
submission.

1.8.1.12 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-
Contractor’s works, the Employer/Inspection Engineer(IE) shall issue a
certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests &
submission of documents by Contractor/manufacturer but if the tests are
not witnessed by the Employer/IE, the certificate shall be issued within
fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test certificate by the
Employer/IE. Contractor shall, on completion of all tests, submit test reports
within Ten (10) days to POWERGRID IE. Failure of the Employer/IE to issue
such a certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the
Works. The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not
bind the Employer to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests
after erection, be found not to comply with the Contract.

1.8.1.13 In all cases, where the Contract provides for tests whether at the
premises or works of the Contractor or of any Sub- Contractor, the
Contractor, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge
such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus
and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the
Employer/Inspector or his authorised representative to carry out
effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the Contract
and shall give facilities to the Employer/Inspection Engineer or to his
authorised representative to accomplish testing.

1.8.1.14 The inspection and acceptance by Employer and issue of Inspection

Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of
the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance programme
forming a part of the Contract, or if such equipment is found to be
defective at a later stage.

Page 11 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
1.8.1.15 The Employer will have the right of having at his own expenses any other
test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site
or in any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to
satisfy that the material comply with the specification.

1.8.1.16 The Employer reserves the right for getting any additional field tests
conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site to satisfy that
material complies with specifications.

1.8.1.17 Rework/ Re-engineering, if any, on any item/equipment shall be carried out

only after mutual discussions and in accordance with mutually agreed
procedure. Contractor shall submit Joint Inspection Report of equipments
under Re-Work/Re-Engineering alongwith procedure for the same to
POWERGRID for approval, before taking up the Re-Work/Re-Engineering,
failing which POWERGRID reserves the right to reject the equipment.

1.8.1.18 Contractor may establish a field test Laboratory to execute Civil

Construction testing requirements at site with the condition that all testing
equipment shall be calibrated from POWERGRID approved accredited
Testing laboratories, with calibration certificates kept available at site and
all testing personnel employed in the Field Testing Laboratories to be
qualified and experienced Engineers or testing to be carried out at
POWERGRID approved Third Party Laboratories.

1.8.1.19 Contractor shall ensure that all possible steps are taken to avoid damages to
the equipment during transport, storage and erection.

1.8.1.20 The Employer reserves the right to increase or decrease their involvement in
inspections at Contractor’s Works or at his Sub-Contractor’s premises or at
the Employer’s site or at any other place of Work based on performance of
Contractor/sub Contractor.

1.8.1.21 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of

manufacture prior to dispatch and shall be concluded so as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the work.
1.8.1.22 Should any item being supplied be found not to comply with the supplied
design, it shall be liable to rejection. No item once rejected shall be
resubmitted for inspection, except in cases where the Employer or his
authorised representative considers that the defects can be rectified. All
rejected material shall be disposed off / destroyed under intimation to
Employer QA&I representative as per laid down procedures.
1.8.1.23 The specified grade and quality of material from approved source shall be
used by the Contractor. To ascertain the quality of material used, the
Page 12 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 inspector may at his discretion get the material tested at an approved
laboratory.
1.8.2 Tests
1.8.2.1 The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall
be carried-out on the material and shall mean as follows:
1.8.2.2 Type Tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove the
process of manufacture and general conformity of the material to this
Specification. These tests shall be carried out on samples prior to
commencement of commercial production against the order.
1.8.2.3 Acceptance Tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on
samples taken from each lot offered for pre-dispatch inspection, for the
purposes of acceptance of that lot.
1.8.2.4 Routine Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on the
material to check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
1.8.2.5 Tests during Manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be
carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the
Contractor to ensure the desired quality of the end product to be supplied.
1.8.2.6 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be as per the
Quality Assurance Programme to be mutually agreed to by the Contractor
and the Employer.
1.8.2.7 The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed
against them. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this
Specification, the norms and procedure of the test shall be as specified in
Annexure-A or as mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the
Employer in the Quality Assurance Programme.
1.8.2.8 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values
specified in this Specification or guaranteed by the Bidder, as applicable.
1.8.2.9 In case of any failure or defect / deficiency observed in material supplied
Employer reserves the right to carry out any tests on the material supplied
to site, if required to prove conformity of material to the specification for
which testing charges shall be borne by contractor / manufacturer.

1.9 Standard Technical Particulars

1.9.1 The Standard Technical Particulars of the various items are given in the
relevant schedule of the specification. The bidder is required to comply with
the same.

Page 13 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
1.10 Packing
1.10.1 All the materials shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and
crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and
storage at Site till the time of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible
for any loss or damage during transportation, handling and storage due to
improper packing.
1.10.2 The Contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing
the materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport by air, sea, rail
and road.
1.10.3 All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever
necessary, proper arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be
provided. All packages shall be clearly marked for with signs showing ‘up’
and ‘down’ on the sides of boxes, and handling and unpacking instructions
as considered necessary. Special precaution shall be taken to prevent
rusting of steel and iron parts during transit by sea.
1.10.4 The cases containing easily damageable material shall be very carefully
packed and marked with appropriate caution symbols, i.e. fragile, handle
with care, use no hook etc. wherever applicable.
1.10.5 Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor at his expenses
showing the details such as description and quantity of contents, the name
of the consignee and address, the gross and net weights of the package, the
name of the Contractor etc.
1.10.6 Angle section shall be wire bundled.
1.10.7 Cleat angles, gusset plates, brackets, fillet plate, hanger and similar loose
pieces shall be tested and bolted together in multiples or securely wired
through holes.
1.10.8 Bolts, nuts washers and other attachments shall be packed in double gunny
bags accurately tagged in accordance with the contents.
1.10.9 The packing shall be properly done to avoid losses & damages during transit.
Each bundle or package shall be appropriately marked.

1.11 Storage of Material under Transmission Line Package.

Brief guidelines including typical drawing for storage of different type of

construction material used in the transmission line projects are as under:

1.11.1 Cement Storage:

Cement received at site should be stored in a building or shed which is dry,

leak proof and moisture proof. The building should have minimum numbers
Page 14 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 of windows. Cement bags stored and stacked off the floor on wooden
planks in such a way so as to keep about 150 mm to 200 mm clearance from
the ground. The floor may be of lean cement concrete or two layers of dry
bricks laid on well consolidated earth. A minimum space of 600 mm shall be
kept around and between the exterior walls and the stacks. In stacks, bags
shall be kept close together to reduce air circulation. The height of the stack
shall not be more than 12 bags and the width of the stack shall not be more
than four bags or 3 meters. For extra safety during monsoon, or when it is
expected to store for an unusually long period, the stack shall be completely
enclosed by a waterproofing membrane such as polyethylene etc. Different
type and make of cement shall be stacked and stored separately.

1.11.2 Aggregates:

Aggregates shall be stored at site on a hard dry and level patch of ground. If
such a surface is not available, a platform of planks or old corrugated iron
sheets, or floor bricks or a thin layer of lean concrete shall be made so as to
prevent contamination with clay, dust, vegetable and other foreign matter.
The stacks of fine and coarse aggregates shall be kept in separate stock piles
sufficiently removed from each other to prevent the material at the edges
of the piles from getting intermixed. Fine aggregate shall be stacked in a
place where loss due to the effect of wind is minimum.

1.11.3 Reinforcement Steel

For each classification of steel, separate areas shall be earmarked. It is

desirable that ends of bars and sections of each class be painted in distinct
separate colors. Steel reinforcement shall be stored in such a way as to
avoid distortion and to prevent deterioration and corrosion. It is desirable
to coat reinforcement with cement wash before stacking to prevent scaling
and rusting in case of storage time exceeding one month. In store,
reinforcement bars shall be stacked above ground level by at least 150 mm
either on brick/cement/stone platform or concrete/bricks planks.

1.11.4 Structural Steel Or Tower Parts

The structural steer of different classification, sizes and lengths shall be

stored separately. These shall be stored above ground level at least 150 mm
upon platforms, skids or any other suitable supports to avoid any distortion
of sections. Also, in order to prevent white rust formation sufficient care
should be exercised while storing, handling and transporting galvanized
products. The structural steel/tower parts shall be stored in an adequately
ventilated area. The article shall be stored with spacers in between them
and kept at an inclination to facilitate easy drainage of any water collected
on the structural steel/tower parts.
Page 15 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
1.11.5 Conductor & Earthwire Drums

It is essential to save the conductor drums from damage during storage and
transportation and the wooden battens and main wheel should be intact so
that same can be successfully mounted on the conductor jacks to release
the conductor during stringing. All the conductor and earthwire drums
should be stored on a proper hard platform above ground to avoid
deterioration of the drum and further avoiding the damage of conductor.
The conductor & earthwire drums should be stored in such a manner that
each drum can be accessed at any time for inspection purposes.

1.11.6 Hardware fitting, Accessories & Insulators

All the hardware fittings, accessories and insulators should be stored on

raised platform above ground so as not to damage the packaging and to
avoid further damage or denting on the fittings and chipping of insulators.
All the aluminum parts should be stored on a plain/raised platform under a
cover shed in such a way that the aluminum fittings cannot be distorted
during storage.

2.0 Employer’s Environment and Social Policy and its Implementation

2.1 Development and growth of mankind through Industrialization and
unwarranted use of natural resources has inflicted considerable impact on
Environment and Society. As a result, Environmental and Social issues have
emerged as the focal point of global debate.
Employer’s activities by their inherent nature and flexibility have negligible
impacts on environmental and social attributes. In order to address these
issues and to match the rising expectations of a cleaner, safer and healthier
environment, Employerhas evolved its Environmental and Social Policy and
Procedures (ESPP). The key principles of Employer’s Environmental and
Social Policy are:
i) Avoidance of environmentally and socially sensitive areas while
planning project activities.
ii) Minimisation of impacts when project activities occur in
environmentally and socially sensitive areas.
iii) Mitigation of any unavoidable adverse impacts arising out of its
projects.
2.2 Basic issues to be kept in mind while carrying out construction activities are
to

Page 16 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 i) Avoid socially sensitive areas with regard to human habitations and
areas of cultural significance.
ii) Secure the interest of people affected by Employer’s projects.
iii) Involve local people affected by transmission line projects as per
requirement and suitability.
iv) Consult affected people in decisions having implication to them if
considered necessary.
v) Apply, efficient and safe technology/practices.
vi) Keep abreast of all potential dangers to people’s health, occupational
safety and safety of environment and the respective mitigatory
measures.
vii) Establish preventive mechanisms to guarantee safety.
viii) Mitigation measures in case of accidents.
ix) Avoid unwarranted cutting of trees in forest area.
2.3 While constructing the lines through forest stretches the contractor will
provide alternate fuel to its employee e.g. working labours/supervisors etc.
in order to avoid cutting of forest woods.
2.4 Contractor will ensure safety to the wild life, during working/camping near
to the National park.
2.5 Contractor during construction of lines in agricultural fields will ensure
minimum damages to the crops, trees, bunds, irrigation etc. If the same is
un-avoidable, the decision of Engineer- in-charge shall be final.
2.6 The waste/excess material/debris should be removed from the construction
site including agricultural field, forest stretches, river etc. immediately after
construction work.
2.7 The Contractor will ensure least disturbance to the hill slope and natural
drainage so as to avoid soil erosion. Natural drainage in plain area if
disturbed is to be trained to the satisfaction of Engineer- in-charge.
2.8 As far as possible existing path/kutchha road/approach shall be used for the
construction.
2.9 The Contractor will ensure supply of stone chips/sand from
authorised/approved quarry areas.
2.10 Proper documentation of above, if any.
2.11 The Environment & Social Policy and Procedures (ESPP) evolved by
POWERGRID is available at the POWERGRID’s website, powergridindia.com,
which shall be referred by the Bidder for further information.

Page 17 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 Annexure-I
Page 1 of 1

Assessment report from Contractor for proposed sub-vendor along with following
enclosures (to the extent available):

1. Registration / License of the works

2. Organization chart with name and qualification of key persons
3. List of Plant and Machinery.
4. List of testing equipment with their calibration status.
5. List of Raw material, bought out items with sourcing details
6. List of out-sourced services with sourcing details.
7. List of supply in last three years.
8. Third party approval, if any (viz. ISO, BIS),
9. Pollution clearance wherever applicable
10. Energy Conservation & Efficiency report
(Applicable to industries having contract load more than 100 KVA)
11. Formats for RM, in process and acceptance testing
12. Type test approvals conducted in last 5 years, if applicable
13. Performance Certificates from customers
14. Photographs of factory, plant and machinery & testing facilities

Page 18 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 Annexure-II

MQP & INSPECTION LEVEL REQUIREMENT

Sl. Item / Equipment Requirement Inspection Level
No. of
MQP/ITP/FAT
1 Insulator (Disc, Long Rod, Solid Core) Yes IV
2 Conductor Yes IV

3 MS Round for Earthmat (40mm dia) No I

4 Re-rollers of MS/HT Angle Section and Yes IV
galvanized tower parts.
5 Hardware fittings & Earthwire Yes IV
Accessories
6 OPGW & H/W Yes III
7 Bolts & Nuts Gr up to 5.6/5 Yes II
8 Bolts & Nuts of Gr 8.8 / 8 Yes IV
9 D-shackle/ Hanger / Links Yes IV

10 Danger Plate /Phase Plate / Number No I

Plate / Circuit plate
11 Pipe Type & Counter Poise Earthing No II
12 Spring Washer No II
13 ACD & Barbed wire for ACD/Bird guard No II

14 Span Marker & Obstruction Light No III

Note:
* MICC for test and measuring equipment shall be issued only after actual
verification/demonstration of satisfactory performance at site.
** Though level-2 items, CIP can be issued also on review of TCs and visual
inspection of these items.

Page 19 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 Annexure- III
MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN Page 1 of 2
Manufacturers Details Customer Vendor's Item: Q.P. No. Valid
(Name, Works Address Code: From:
etc.)
POWERGRID Rev. No. Valid
Upto:
Date:

Sr. Components / Type of Quantum Reference Acceptance Format of Applicable Codes Remarks
No. Operations & check of Check document Norms Record 1 2 3 4 5 6
Description of Test / for Testing
Sampling
with
basis

A. Section: RAW MATERIAL

INSPECTION

B. Section : IN PROCESS
INSPECTION

C. Section: FINAL TESTING

D. Section: PACKING &

DISPATCH

Page 20 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
 MANUFACTURING QUALITY PLAN Page 2 of 2
Customer Vendor's Item: Q.P. No. Valid From:
Code:
POWERGRID Rev. No. Valid Upto:
Date:

Indicates place where testing is planned to be performed i.e.

Code 1 Inspection location Code 2 Indicates who has to perform the tests i.e. Testing Agency
A At Equipment Manufacturer's works J The Equipment Manufacturer
B At Component Manufacturer's works K The Component Manufacturer
C At Authorised Distributor's place L The Third Party
D At Independent Lab M The Turnkey Contractor
E At Turn Key Contractor's location
F Not specified

Review of Test
Code 3 Indicates who shall witness the tests i.e. Witnessing Agency Code 4 Reports/Certificates
By Equipment manufacturer during raw material/bought out component
P Component Manufacturer itself W Inspection.
Q Component Manufacturer and Equipment Manufacturer X By Contractor during product/process inspection
Component Manufacturer, Equipment Manufacturer and
R Contractor Y By POWERGRID during product/process inspection
S Equipment Manufacturer itself Z By Contractor and/or POWERGRID during product/process inspection
T Equipment Manufacturer and Contractor
U Equipment Manufacturer, Contractor and POWERGRID
V Third Party itself

Whether specific approval of sub-vendor / Component make is Whether test records required to be submitted after final inspection for
Code 5 envisaged? Code 6 issuance of CIP/MICC
E Envisaged Y Yes
Not Envisaged N No

Page 21 of 21
SECTION - II, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018
SECTION-III
 SECTION-III

CONTENTS

Clause Description Page No.

1.0 General information & Scope Of Work 1

2.0 Route Alignment 2

3.0 Detailed Survey 4

4.0 Geotechnical Investigations 13

5.0 Statutory Regulations and Standards 35

 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
SECTION - III
SURVEY & SOIL INVESTIGATION
1. General Information & Scope Of Work
1.1 The technical specifications covers detailed survey including route alignment,
profiling, tower spotting, optimization of locations, check survey, contouring, and
soil investigation for the transmission lines / part of the transmission lines covered
under this specification as included in the BPS.
1.1.1 The scope of work inter-alia shall include the following:-
a. Detailed Survey using Total Work stations or alternatively using ALTM (Airborne
Laser Terrain Modeling) techniques, inter-alia including :
i. Digitised profiling along the selected route along with plan details.
ii. Computer aided tower spotting & optimization
iii. Soil resistivity measurement along the route
b. Check survey including digitised contouring at undulated / hilly tower locations.
c. Soil Investigation
d. Preparation of Survey reports including estimation of Bill of Quantities,
identification and explanation of route constraints (like Forest, Animal/Bird
sanctuary, reserve coal belt areas, oil pipe line/underground inflammable pipe
lines etc.), infrastructure details available enroute etc.
e. Collection of data/details of ownership of land within the line corridor & tower
base.
1.2 The Provisional quantities for the scope of work are indicated in relevant Price
Schedules of BPS. The final quantities for route alignment, detailed survey and check
survey (quantities in “kms” unit) shall be as approved by Site Engineer-in-charge and
shall be along the approved route alignment. For contouring at undulated/hilly tower
locations and soil investigations (quantities in “Locs.” unit), the actual quantities to be
executed shall be decided by Site Engineer-in-charge during execution stage and the
final quantities shall be as approved by Site Engineer-in-charge. The route alignment,
detailed survey, including profiling & tower spotting, contouring, soil investigation,
check survey etc shall be carried out by the Contractor as per the technical
specifications stipulated herein.
1.3 The Contractor must note that the Employer shall not be responsible for loss or
damage to properties, trees etc. due to contractor’s work during survey. The
Page 1 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Contractor shall indemnify the Employer for any loss or damage to properties, trees
etc. during the survey work.
1.4 The Contractor should note that Employer will not furnish topographical maps
prepared by survey of India but will make available assistance that may be required in
obtaining these by providing letters of recommendation to the concerned
authorities. Further, in case the contractor opts for use of ALTM techniques for
detailed survey, he shall be responsible for obtaining necessary
clearances/permissions, as may be required from concerned authorities. The
Employer will provide assistance that may be required in obtaining these clearances /
permissions by providing letters of recommendation to the concerned authorities.
1.5 The work shall be carried out by the contractor using modern surveying techniques.
The bidder shall indicate in his offer, the detailed description of the procedure to be
deployed. The details of the equipment & facilities including softwares for image
processing, computer aided tower spotting etc. available with the bidder or his
associates shall also be furnished with the bid.
1.6 The Contractor shall also engage services of a reputed geo-technical consultant or
experts from independent educational/research institutions for examining stability
aspects of the selected transmission line route/locations in hilly terrain wherever
required.
1.7 After carrying out the detailed survey and soil investigations, the contractor shall
submit complete BOQ of the transmission lines, Tower schedule, Profiles, Survey
reports and other details as per technical specification requirements to the Employer.
2. Route Alignment
2.1 The route Alignment shall be carried out by the contractor using Survey of India
topographical maps.
2.2 Requirement of Transmission Line Routing
2.2.1. The Re-alignment/routing, if any required, of the transmission line shall be most
economical from the point of view of construction and maintenance. The contractor
shall identify & examine alternative route alignments and suggest to the Employer
the optimal route alignment.
2.2.2. Routing/Re-routing of transmission line through protected/reserved forest area
should be avoided. In case it is not possible to avoid the forests or areas having large
trees completely, then keeping in view of the overall economy, the route should be
aligned in such a way that involvement of forest area and cutting of trees is
minimum.
2.2.3. The route should have minimum crossings of Major river, Railway lines,
National/State highways, overhead EHV power line and communication lines.
2.2.4. The number of angle points shall be kept to minimum.
Page 2 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
2.2.5. The distance between the terminal points specified shall be kept shortest possible,
consistent with the terrain that is encountered.
2.2.6. Marshy and low lying areas, river beds and earth slip zones shall be avoided to
minimize risk to the foundations.
2.2.7. It would be preferable to utilize level ground for the alignment.
2.2.8. Crossing of power lines shall be minimum. Alignment of a transmission line with
respect to existing line will be kept considering ROW and tower falling distance.
2.2.9. Crossing of communication line shall be minimized and it shall be preferably at right
angle. Proximity and parallelism with telecom lines shall be eliminated to avoid
danger of induction to them.
2.2.10. Areas subjected to flooding such as nalah shall be avoided.
2.2.11. Restricted areas such as civil and military airfield shall be avoided. Care shall also be
taken to avoid aircraft landing approaches.
2.2.12. All alignment should be easily accessible both in dry and rainy seasons to enable
maintenance throughout the year.
2.2.13. Certain areas such as quarry sites, tea, tobacco and saffron fields and rich
plantations, gardens & nurseries which will present the Employer problems in
acquisition of right of way and way leave clearance during construction and
maintenance should be avoided.
2.2.14. Angle points during survey should be selected such that shifting of the point within
100 m radius is possible at the time of construction of the line.
2.2.15. The line routing should avoid large habitations, densely populated areas, Forest,
Animal/Bird sanctuary, reserve coal belt areas, oil pipe line/underground
inflammable pipe lines etc. to the extent possible.
2.2.16. The areas requiring special foundations and those prone to flooding should be
avoided.
2.3 For examination of the alternatives & identification of the most appropriate route,
besides making use of information/data/details available/extracted through Survey
of India Topographical maps, the contractor shall also carryout
reconnaissance/preliminary survey as may be required for verification & collection of
additional information /data /details.
2.4 The contractor shall submit his preliminary observations & suggestions along with
various information/data /details collected, topographical map data marked with the
alternative routes etc. The final evaluation of the alternative routes shall be
conducted by the contractor in consultation with Employer’s representatives and
optimal route alignment shall be proposed by the contractor. Site visit and field

Page 3 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 verification shall be conducted by the contractor jointly with the Employer’s
representative for the proposed route alignment.
2.5 Final route alignment drawing with latest topographical and other details/features
including all rivers, railway lines, canals, roads etc. up to 8 kms on both sides of
selected route alignment shall be submitted by the contractor for Employer’s
approval along with report containing other information/details as mentioned above.
2.6 Changes in the route alignment, if any, during detail survey, shall be incorporated in
the final route alignment drawings.
3. Detailed Survey
3.1 The detailed survey shall be carried out using Total stations etc. along the approved
route alignment. As an alternative, the contractor may also use ALTM (Airborne Laser
Terrain Modeling) techniques of equal or better accuracy for the detailed survey.
3.2 Soil resistivity, along the route alignment shall be measured in dry weather by four
electrode method keeping inter-electrode spacing of 50 mtrs. For calculating soil
resistivity formula 2ar (Where a=50 m and r= megger reading in ohms) shall be
adopted. Measurement shall be made at every 2 to 3 km along the length of the
route. In case soil characteristics changes within 2 to 3 km, values shall have to be
measured at intermediate locations also. Megger reading and soil characteristics
should also be indicated in the soil resistivity results.
3.3 Route Marking
3.3.1. The route of the transmission line shall be recorded using GPS/DGPS of positional
accuracy less than 3m.
3.3.2. The co-ordinates of all the angle points as well as other important crossings,
landmarks etc. shall be recorded using GPS for easy relocating.
3.3.3. At the starting point of the commencement of route survey a suitable peg/spike shall
be driven firmly into the ground to indicate location of the survey instrument. The
co-ordinates of the location of the survey instrument shall also be recorded. Further,
the co-ordinates at prominent position at intervals of not more than 750 meter along
the transmission line to be surveyed up to the next angle point shall also be recorded.
Wooden peg of 50 x 50 x 650mm size shall also be driven at prominent position at
intervals of not more than 750 metre along the transmission line to be surveyed up
to the next angle point. Wire nails of 50 mm length should be fixed on the top of
these pegs to show the location of instrument. The pegs shall be driven firmly into
the ground to project 100mm only above ground level. Wherever the line alignment
crosses the EHT line, Railway line, P&T line or roads, the contractor shall record co-
ordinates on the points of crossing. Wherever line route alignment passes over
permanent land marks such as rock, boulders, culverts etc. suitable white paint marks
with directional and POWERGRID markings shall be made and co-ordinates recorded.
At angle positions stone / concrete pillars of 150 x 150 x 1000mm in size with
Page 4 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 POWERGRID marked on them shall be embedded into the ground for easy
identification.
3.4 Profiling
3.4.1. The complete profiling along the route shall be carried out using modern surveying
equipments viz. total stations. Reference levels at every 20 metres along the route
are to be recorded. R/Ls at other undulations along the route as well as in the route
plan and other enroute details viz. crossings, building & structures, trees & other
infrastructure etc shall also be recorded. Areas along the route, which in the view of
the contractor, are not suitable for tower spotting, shall also be marked in profile.
Any undulation keeping conductor location as reference may also be indicated as
dotted line in profile.
3.4.2. The complete profiling details shall be digitized and the data shall be prepared &
stored in the format compatible to computer-aided tower spotting software.
3.4.3. A printed/plotted output of the digitized profiling shall be submitted by the
contractor to Employer’s site-in-charge for review before taking up computer-aided
tower spotting.
3.5 Optimisation of Tower Location / Tower Spotting
3.5.1. Optimisation of tower locations including profiling shall be done by the contractor
using computer-aided tower spotting software - PLSCADD and shall furnish sample
calculations and manual tower spotting drawings for some typical sections.
3.5.2. The sag-tension characteristics of the conductor as well as tower spotting data shall
be furnished by the Employer to the contractor during execution stage. Sag template
curves, if any required for tower spotting, shall be prepared by the contractor and
two sets of sag-template curves shall be given to POWERGRID for checking of profile.
3.5.3. General description of towers is indicated in Section – I of this specification for
information of the Bidders.
3.5.4. Tower Spotting
While profiling & spotting the towers, the following shall be borne in mind:

a) Span
The number of consecutive spans between the section points shall not exceed 15
spans or 5 Km in plain terrain and 10 spans or 3km in hilly terrain. A section point
shall comprise of tension point with B/DB/QB type or C/DC/QC type or D/DD/QD type
towers as applicable.

Page 5 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 b) Extension/Truncation
An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In case an
individual span becomes too short with normal supports on account of undulations in
ground profile, one or both the supports of the span may be extended by inserting
standard body/leg extension. In case of locations where the ground clearance is
available, truncated towers may be spotted. The provisions kept in the design of
towers w.r.t. body/leg extns, truncations shall be intimated to the contractor by the
Employer during execution stage.
c) Loading
There shall not be any upward force on suspension towers under normal working
conditions and the suspension towers shall support at least the minimum weight
span as provided in the designs. In case uplift is unavoidable, it shall be examined if
the same can be overcome by adding standard body extensions to the towers failing
which tension towers designed for the purpose shall be deployed at such positions.
d) Road Crossing
At all important road crossings, the tower shall be fitted with normal suspension and
tension insulator strings depending on the type of tower, but the ground clearance at
the roads under maximum temperature and in still air shall be such that even with
conductor broken in adjacent span, ground clearance of the conductor from the road
surfaces will not be less than specified minimum ground clearances. At all national
highways, D/DD/QD type towers tension insulator strings shall be used and crossing
span will not be more than 250 meters, unless higher span is permitted by national
highways authority in case of highways having more lanes.
e) Railway Crossings
All the railway crossings coming-enroute the transmission line shall be identified by
the Contractor. At the time of detailed survey, the railway crossings shall be finalised
based on the following and also confirming to the regulation laid down by the
Railway Authorities.
i) The crossings shall be supported on D/DD/QD type tower on either side.
ii) The crossing shall normally be at right angle to the railway track.
iii) The minimum horizontal distance measured at right angles from the centre of
nearest track to any part of a structure (all structures shall be rigid and well
founded), carrying electrical conductors crossing a railway shall be equal to the
height of the structure in meters above normal ground level plus 6 meters.
iv) No crossing shall be located over a booster transformer, traction switching
station, traction sub-station, Overlap Section or a track cabin location in an
electrified area.

Page 6 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 v) The crossing span will be limited to 300 meters or 80 % of the normal span for
which the structure are designed whichever is less.

vi) Minimum ground clearance between crossing conductor under condition of

maximum sag and railway line shall maximum of following :

(I) For Electrified Section:

Minimum clearances from Rail Level

At OHE Structures At Mid OHE Span

1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 15.56 m 12.994 m

2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 16.46 m 14.524 m

3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 18.26 m 15.534 m

4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 19.16 m 17.884 m

5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 21.86 m 17.884 m

(II) For Non Electrified Section:

Minimum clearances from Rail Level

1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 15.56 m

2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 16.46 m

3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 18.26 m

4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 19.16 m

5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 21.86 m

(III) Minimum Clearances between Highest Traction Conductor & Lowest

Crossing Conductor

1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 3.05 m

2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 4.58 m

Page 7 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 5.49 m

4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 7.94 m

5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 7.94 m

f) River Crossings
In case of major river crossing, river crossing towers shall be of suspension type along
with anchor towers of D/DD/QD type tower on either side of the main river crossing.
Alternately on the basis of economics and / or site/ execution constraints crossing of
rivers using normal extended angle towers (+18/+25/+30M Extns.) also shall be
considered. For navigable rivers, clearance required by navigation authority shall be
provided. For non navigable river, clearance shall be reckoned with respect to
highest flood level (HFL).
g) Power line Crossings
Where the line is to cross over another line, towers with suitable extensions may be
used, depending upon the merit of the prevailing site condition.
For power line crossing of 400 kV or above voltage level, large angle & dead end
towers (I.e D/DD/QD) shall be used on either side of power line crossing (i.e
D/DD/QD- D/DD/QD arrangement).
For power line crossing of 132 kV and 220 kV voltage level, angle towers
(B/C/D/DB/DC/DD/ QB/QC/QD) shall be used on either side of power line crossing
depending upon the merit of the prevailing site condition and line deviation
requirement.
For power line crossing of 66 kV and below voltage level, suspension/tension towers
shall be provided on either side of power line crossing depending upon the merit of
the prevailing site condition and line deviation requirement.
In case of crossing with B/C/DB/DC/QB/QC towers proper guying shall be provided to
facilitate stringing of the power line crossing sections separately on obtaining line
shutdowns.
Clearance between lines crossing each other shall be kept in accordance with the
CEA (Measures Relating to Safety and Electric Supply) Regulations, 2010 as amended
up-to-date. In order to reduce the height of the crossing towers, it may be
advantageous to remove the ground-wire of the line to be crossed (if this is possible
and permitted by the Employer of the line to be crossed)
Minimum clearance in metres between lines when crossing each other:

Page 8 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Nominal 500KV 800KV 1200KV
Sl. 110-
System 220KV 400KV 765KV HVDC HVDC
No. 132KV
Voltage
1. 110-132KV 3.05 4.58 5.49 7.94 6.86 9.04 10.44
2. 220KV 4.58 4.58 5.49 7.94 6.86 9.04 10.44
3. 400KV 5.49 5.49 5.49 7.94 6.86 9.04 10.44
4. 765KV 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94 9.04 10.44
5. 500KV HVDC 6.86 6.86 6.86 6.86 7.94 9.04 10.44
6. 800KV HVDC 9.04 9.04 9.04 9.04 9.04 9.04 10.44
7. 1200 KV 10.44 10.44 10.44 10.44 10.44 10.44 10.44

h) Telecommunication Line Crossings

The angle of crossing shall be as near to 90 degree possible. However, deviation to
the extent of 30 degree may be permitted under exceptionally difficult situations.
When the angle of crossing has to be below 60 degree, the matter will be referred to
the authority in charge of the telecommunication System. On a request from the
Contractor, the permission of the telecommunication authority may be obtained by
the Employer.
Also, in the crossing span, power line support will be as near the telecommunication
line as possible, to obtain increased vertical clearance between the wires.
i) Oil Pipe-Line Crossings
Wherever transmission line crosses an oil/gas pipeline, the angle of crossing shall be
as near to 90 degree possible. Further, a minimum separation of 3m should be
maintained between pipe line and transmission line footings & pipe/counterpoise
earthing.
j) Details Enroute
All topographical details, permanent features, such as trees, building etc. 44.5m
(1200 kV S/C), 33.5m (765kV D/C), 32m (765kV S/C Delta), 42.5m (765kV S/C Horz.),
34.5m (+/- 800kV HVDC), 26m (400kV S/C), 23m (400KV D/C), 26m (+/- 500kV HVDC),
17.5m (220KV), 13.5m (132 KV) on either side of the alignment shall be detailed on
the profile plan.
3.6 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.
Clearance from ground, buildings, trees and telephone lines shall be provided in
conformity with the CEA’s Regulations 2010 (Measures relating to Safety and Electric
Supply).

Page 9 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
3.6.1. The Contractor shall count, mark and put proper numbers with suitable quality of
paint at his own cost on all the trees that are to be cut by the Employer at the time of
actual execution of the work as detailed below. Contractor may please note that
Employer shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the properties or
for tree cutting due to Contractor’s work.
3.6.2. To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming within 44.5m (1200 kV S/C),
33.5m (765kV D/C), 32m (765kV S/C Delta), 42.5m (765kV S/C Horz.), 34.5m (+/-
800kV HVDC), 26m (400kV S/C), 23m (400KV D/C), 26m (+/- 500kV HVDC), 17.5m
(220KV), 13.5m (132 KV) on either side of the central line alignment the trees will be
numbered and marked with quality paint serially from angle point 1 (I) onwards and
the corresponding number will be painted on the stem of trees at a height of 1 meter
from ground level. The trees list should contain the following:
a) Girth (circumstances) measured at a height of 1 meter from ground level.
b) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of +2 meters.
c) Name of the type of the species/tree.
d) The bushy and under growth encountered within the 89m (1200 kV S/C) , 67m
(765kV D/C), 64m (765kV S/C Delta), 85m (765kV S/C Horz.), 69m (+/- 800kV
HVDC), 52m (400kV S/C), 46m (400KV D/C), 52m (+/- 500kV HVDC), 35m (220KV),
27m (132 KV) line should also be evaluated with its type, height, girth and area in
square meters, clearly indicating the growth in the tree/bush statement.
3.6.3. The contractor shall also intimate the Employer, his assessment about the likely
amount of tree & crop compensation etc. required to be paid by the Employer during
execution stage. This assessment shall be done considering prevailing
practices/guidelines, local regulations and other enquiries from local authorities.
3.6.3.1 The contractor shall also collect data/details of ownership of land within the line
corridor and tower base from the concerned revenue/local authorities and submit
the same to owner as per format enclosed with this technical specification at
Annexure-E.
3.6.4. The Contractor shall also identify the forest/non forest areas involved duly
authenticated by concerned authorities.
a) A statement of forest areas with survey/compartment Nos.(all type of forest
RF/PF/Acquired forest/Revenue forest/Private forest/Forest as per dictionary
meaning of forest etc.)
b) A statement of non-forest areas with survey/compartment nos.
c) Tree cutting details(Girth wise & specie wise)

Page 10 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 d) Marking of forest areas with category on topo sheets 1:2,50,000 showing
complete line route, boundaries of various forest divisions and their areas
involved.
e) Village forest maps of affected line and affected forest area and marking of the
same.
f) Forest division map showing line and affected forest area.
3.6.5 The Contractor shall finalize the forest clearance proposal on the prescribed format,
as per requirements of the state / MOE & F, duly completed in all respects for
submission by the Employer to the Forest Department.
3.7 Preliminary Schedule
The profile sheets showing the locations of the towers together with preliminary
schedules of quantities indicating tower types, wind & weight spans, angle of
deviation, crossing & other details etc. shall be submitted by the contractor for
review & approval by Employer’s site-in-charge.
3.8 Check Survey of Tower Locations
3.8.1. The check survey shall be conducted to locate tower locations on ground conforming
to the approved profile and tower schedule.
3.8.2. The co-ordinates of all the tower locations shall also be recorded using GPS / DGPS of
positional accuracy less than 3m for easy relocating. The position of all tower
locations shall be marked in the final digitized route alignment drawing with relative
distances from any permanent bench mark area.
3.8.3. The contractor shall also collect required data at each tower location in respect of soil
strata, ground water level, history of water table in adjacent areas/surface water,
distance from permanent bench mark (these details to be furnished in a tabulated
form) and classify the suitable type of foundation at each tower location based on
the data collected at each location and detailed soil investigations carried out at
selected locations etc.
3.9 Contouring at hilly/undulated locations
3.9.1. The levels up or down of each pit centre with respect to centre of tower location shall
be recorded at intervals of 2m using total stations/GPS/digital theodolite and
digitized contour plans shall be made. Based on the digitized elevation plans, the
quantities of benching & protection work vis-à-vis possible unequal leg extensions
shall be optimized using suitable computer-aided techniques/softwares or manual
method. Required tower and foundation details, cost data for comparative
evaluation for benching & protection work vis-à-vis unequal leg extensions shall be
provided by the Employer to the Contractor during execution stage.

Page 11 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
3.10 The changes desired by the Employer in the preliminary tower schedule or as may be
required based on detailed survey of tower locations & contouring by the contractor,
shall be carried out by the contractor and the final tower schedule shall be submitted
for approval of Employer. The tower schedule shall show position of all type of
towers, span length, type of foundation for each tower, benching & revetment
requirement, unequal leg extensions, deviation at all angles, crossings & other details
etc.
3.11 Survey Methodology & Precision
3.11.1. All elevations shall be referenced to benchmarks established by the survey of India.
Survey operations shall begin and end at benchmarks approved by the Employer.
3.11.2. During the leveling of the profile, check surveys will be effected at intervals not
exceeding 50kms. with benchmarks of known elevations. The difference in elevations
as surveyed by the contractor and as declared by Survey of India for these
benchmarks shall not exceed the precision required for 3rd order surveys e ≤ 24k
where k is the distance between benchmarks in km and e is the difference between
elevations in mm.
3.11.3. In the absence of suitable benchmarks the leveling shall be done by two independent
leveling parties working in opposite directions along the same line. The difference in
elevations between the two surveys shall not exceed the precision required for 3 rd
order surveys as stated above.
3.11.4. All important objects and features along the transmission line centerline (railways,
highways, roads, canals, rivers, transmission lines, distribution lines, telephone lines
etc.) shall be surveyed and located with a positional accuracy of 1:2000 between
points of known horizontal position.
3.12 Survey Report
3.12.1. Complete BOQ of the transmission lines as per format enclosed with this technical
specification at Annexure-A shall be furnished in the survey report.
3.12.2. Each angle point locations shall be shown with detailed sketches showing existing
close by permanent land marks such as specific tree(s), cattle shed, homes, tube
wells, temples, electric pole/tower, telephone pole, canal, roads, railway lines etc.
The relative distance of land marks from the angle points and their bearings shall be
indicated in the sketch. These details shall be included in the survey report.
3.12.3. Information w.r.t infrastructure details available enroute, identification and
explanation of route constraints, etc shall also be furnished in the Survey report and
shall inter-alia include the following:
3.12.3.1. Information regarding infrastructural facilities available along the final route
alignment like access to roads, railway stations, construction material sources (like

Page 12 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 quarry points for stone, sand and availability of construction water), labour, existing
transport facilities, fuel availability etc. shall be furnished in the survey report.
3.12.3.2. All observations which the Contractor thinks would be useful to the construction of
the transmission lines mentioned under scope of work are to be reported.
3.12.3.3. Suggestions regarding the number of convenient zones (line segments / portions) in
which the entire alignment can be divided keeping in view the convenience of
construction/project implementation are to be given.
3.12.3.4. Suggestions regarding location for setting up stores during line construction in
consultation with Employer’s representative shall also be provided by the contractor.
3.12.3.5. Working months available during various seasons along the final route alignment,
with period, time of sowing & harvesting of different type of crops and the
importance attached to the crops particularly in the context of way leave problems
and compensation payable shall be stated by the Contractor.
3.12.3.6. Some portions of the line may require clearance from various authorities. The
Contractor shall indicate the portion of the line so affected, the nature of clearance
required and the name of concerned organizations such as local bodies,
municipalities, P&T (name of circle), Inland navigation, Irrigation Department,
Electricity Boards and Zonal railways, Divisional Forest Authorities etc.
3.12.4. All the requisite data for processing the case for statutory clearances such as PTCC,
Forest and Railway shall be provided along with the report.
3.12.5. The contractor shall also collect & report (as per Formats enclosed at B) details
pertaining to pollution levels envisaged along the transmission line.
3.12.6. Four copies of survey reports shall be furnished by the contractor to the Employer.

4. Geotechnical Investigations
4.1 General
4.1.1. Employer requires that a detailed Geotechnical investigation be carried out at various
tower locations to provide the designer with sufficiently accurate information, both
general and specific, about the substrata profile and relevant soil and rock
parameters at site on the basis of which the foundation of transmission line towers
can be classified and designed rationally.
4.1.2. These specifications provide general guidelines for geotechnical investigation of
normal soils. Cases of marshy locations and locations affected by salt water or
saltpeter shall be treated as special locations and the corresponding description in
these specifications shall apply. Any other information required for such locations
shall be obtained by Contractor and furnished to Employer.

Page 13 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
4.2 Scope
4.2.1. The scope of work includes detail soil investigations and furnishing bore log data at
various tower locations. The provisional quantities have been indicated in Bill Of
Quantities. Detailed soil investigations shall be carried out at least at one location for
every five kilometer line stretch besides critical locations like railway crossing, river
crossing etc. However, during actual execution of work, the quantities shall be
decided by the Engineer - in - Charge, depending upon the soil strata and terrain.
Based on the bore log data / soil parameter /soil investigation results, the Contractor
shall recommend the type of foundations suitable for each locations and the same
shall be got approved by the Employer. For other locations, trial pit is to be done in
every location for foundation classification up to foundation depth. No separate
payment for trail pit shall be done.
4.2.2. These specifications cover the technical requirements for a detailed Geotechnical
investigation and submission of a detailed Geotechnical Report. The work shall
include mobilization of all necessary tools and equipment, provision of necessary
engineering supervision and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled labour, etc. as
required to carry out the entire field investigation as well as laboratory tests, analysis
and interpretation of data collected and preparation of the Geotechnical Report.
Contractor shall also collect data regarding variation of subsoil water table along the
proposed line route. The aforementioned work shall be supervised by a graduate in
Civil Engineering having at least 5 years of site experience in geotechnical
investigation work.
4.2.3. Contractor shall make his own arrangements to establish the co-ordinate system
required to position boreholes, tests pits and other field test locations as per the
drawings/sketches supplied by Employer. Contractor shall determine the reduced
levels (R.L’s) at these locations with respect to benchmarks used in the detailed
survey. Two reference lines shall be established based on survey data/details.
Contractor shall provide at site all required survey instruments to the satisfactions of
the Employer so that the work can be carried out accurately according to
specifications and drawings. Contractor shall arrange to collect the data regarding
change of course of rivers, major natural streams and nalas, etc., encountered along
the transmission line route from the best available sources and shall furnish complete
hydrological details at the tower location including maximum velocity discharge,
highest flood level (H.F.L), scour depth etc. of the concerned rivers, major streams
and nalas (canals).
4.2.4. The field and laboratory data shall be recorded on the proforma recommended in
relevant Indian Standards. Contractor shall submit to Employer two copies of field
bore logs (one copy each to Employer site and Corporate Office) and all the field
records (countersigned by the Employer) soon after the completion of each
boreholes/test.

Page 14 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
4.2.5. Whenever Contractor is unable to extract undisturbed samples, he shall immediately
inform the Employer. Payment for boring charges shall be subject to Employer being
satisfied that adequate effort has been made to extract undisturbed samples. Special
care shall be taken for locations where marshy soils are encountered and Contractor
in such cases shall ensure that specified numbers of vane shear tests are performed
and the results correlated with other soil parameters.
4.2.6. One copy of all field records and laboratory test results along with soil investigation
report shall be sent to Employer. Employer may observe, at the laboratory testing
procedures.
4.2.7. The Contractor shall interact with the Employer to get acquainted with the different
types of structures envisaged and in assessing the load intensities on the foundation
for the various types of towers in order to enable him to make specific
recommendation for the depth, founding strata, type of foundation and the
allowable bearing pressure.
4.2.8. After reviewing Contractor’s geotechnical investigation draft report, Employer will
call for discussions, to be held normally within one week at Employers site Office, in
order to comment on the report in the presence of Contractor’s Geotechnical
Engineer. Any expenditure associated with the redrafting and finalising the report,
traveling etc. shall be deemed included in the rates quoted for the geotechnical
investigations.
4.2.9. Contractor shall carry out all work expressed and implied in these specifications in
accordance with requirements of the specification.
4.2.10. The contractor shall prepare and submit soil profile along the transmission line route
( in digitized form, with digitized route alignment drawing as base) indicating salient
soil characteristics / features, water table etc based on detailed soil investigations
and other details / information collected during detailed survey.
4.3 General Requirements
4.3.1. Wherever possible, Contractor shall research and review existing local knowledge,
records of test pits, boreholes, etc., types of foundations adopted and the behavior
of existing structures, particularly those similar to the present project.
4.3.2. Contractor shall make use of information gathered from nearby quarries, unlined
wells excavation etc. Study of the general topography of the surrounding areas will
often help in the delineation of different soil types.
4.3.3. Contractor shall gather data regarding the removal of overburden at the tower
location area either by performing test excavations, or by observing soil erosion or
land slides in order to estimate reconsolidation of the soil strata. Similarly, data
regarding recent land fills shall be studied to determine the characteristics of such
land fill as well as the original soil strata.

Page 15 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
4.3.4. The water level in neighboring streams and water courses shall be noted. Contractor
shall make enquiries and shall verify whether there are abandoned underground
works e.g. worked out ballast pits, quarries, old brick fields, mines, mineral workings
etc.
4.3.5. It is essential that equipment and instruments be properly calibrated at the
commencement of the work. If the Employer so desires. Contractor shall arrange for
having the instruments tested at an approved laboratory at its cost and shall submit
the test reports to the Employer. If the Employer desires to witness such tests,
Contractor shall arrange for the same.
4.4 Codes and Standards for Geotechnical Investigations
4.4.1. All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the
latest editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. In case of
conflict between the present specifications and those referred to herein, the former
shall prevail. Internationally accepted standards which ensure equal or higher
performance than those specified shall also be accepted.
4.4.2. All work shall be carried out in accordance with the following Indian Standards and
Codes:

Indian Standards Title International

(IS) Standard/Code

IS:1080-1985 Codes of Practice for Design and Construction

(Reaffirmed in 2011) of Shallow Foundations on soils (other than
Raft, Ring & Shell)

IS:1498-1970 Classification and Identification of Soils for ASTM D 2487

(Reaffirmed in 2011) General Engineering purposes. ASTM D2488

IS:1892-1979 Code of Practice for Subsurface Investigation

(Reaffirmed in 2011) for Foundation

IS:1904-1986 Code of Practice for Design and Construction of

(Reaffirmed in 2015) foundation in Soils: General Requirements.

IS:2131-1981 Method of Standard Penetration Test for Soils ASTM D 1586

(Reaffirmed in 2011)

IS:2132-1986 Code of Practice for Thin Walled Tube Sampling ASTM D 1587
(Reaffirmed in 2011) of Soils

IS:2720- Part 1-39 Method of Test for Soils(Relevant Parts)

(relevant parts)
(Reaffirmed in 2011
& 2015)

Page 16 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Indian Standards Title International
(IS) Standard/Code

IS:2809-1972 Glossary of Terms and symbols Relating to Soil ASTM D 653-14

(Reaffirmed in 2015) Engineering

IS:2911- Part I-VI Code of Practice for Design and construction of

(Reaffirmed in 2015) Pile Foundations (Relevant Parts).

IS:3043-1987 Code of Practice for Earthing

(Reaffirmed in 2016)

IS:4078-1980 Code of Practice for Indexing and Storage of

(Reaffirmed in 2013) Drill Cores.

IS:4091-1979 Code of Practice for Design and Construction of

(Reaffirmed in 2015) Foundations for Transmission Line Towers and
Poles.

IS:4434-1978 Code of Practice for In-situ Vane Shear Test for ASTM D
(Reaffirmed in 2011) Soils 2573(M)-15
ASTM D
4648(M)-16
IS:4453-2009 Code of Practice for Sub-Surface Exploration by
(Reaffirmed in 2012) Pits, Trenches, Drifts and Shafts.

IS:4464-1985 Code of Practice for Presentation of Drilling

(Reaffirmed in 2013) information and core description in Foundation
investigation

IS:4968(Part-II)1976 Method for Subsurface sounding for soils,

(Reaffirmed in 2011) dynamic method using cone and Bentonite
slurry.

IS:5313-1980 Guide for Core Drilling observations.

(Reaffirmed in 2013)

IS:6403-1981 Code of Practice for Determination of Bearing

(Reaffirmed in 2011) Capacity of Shallow Foundation.

IS:6926-1996 Code of Practice for Diamond Core Drilling for

(Reaffirmed in 2015) Site Investigation for River Valley Projects.

IS:6935-1973 Method of Determination of Water level in a

(Reaffirmed in 2012) Bore Hole.

IS:7422-Part(I-V) Symbols and Abbreviations for use in

(Reaffirmed in 2013) Geological Maps Sections and subsurface
Exploratory Logs (Relevant parts).

IS:8009(Part-I)-1976 Code of Practice for Calculation of Settlements

(Reaffirmed in 2013) of Foundations (Shallow Foundations subjected

Page 17 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Indian Standards Title International
(IS) Standard/Code

to symmetrical Vertical Loads).

IS:8764-1998 Method of Determination of Point Load

(Reaffirmed in 2014) Strength Index of Rocks.

IS:9143-1979 Method of Determination of Unconfined ASTM D-7012-

(Reaffirmed in 2016) Compressive Strength of Rock Materials. 14e1

IS:9179-1979 Method of Preparation of Rock Specimen for

(Reaffirmed in 2016) Laboratory Testing.

IS:9259-1979 Specification for Liquid Limit Apparatus. ASTM D 4318-

(Reaffirmed in 2011) 17

IS:9640-1980 Specification for Split Spoon Sampler. ASTM D 1586-

(Reaffirmed in 2011) 11

IS:10050-1981 Method of Determination of Slake Durability ASTM D 4644-

(Reaffirmed in 2016) Index of Rocks. 16

IS:11315(Part- 1- Method for the Quantitative Description of

12)-1987 discontinuities in Rock Mass
(Reaffirmed in 2016)

4.5 Field Investigation for Soils

Tentative numbers of detailed soil investigation to be done is given in BPS
4.5.1. Boring
Boreholes are required for detailed soil investigations.
4.5.1.1. General Requirements
a) Boreholes shall be made to obtain information about the subsoil profile, its
nature and strength and to collect soil samples for strata identification and for
conducting laboratory tests. The minimum diameter of the borehole shall be
150mm and boring shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of
IS:1892 and the present specification:
b) All boreholes shall be 10m deep for normal soil conditions. The depth of
boreholes at river crossings and special locations shall be 40m. If a strata is
encountered where the Standard Penetration Test Records N values greater than
100, with characteristics of rock, the borehole shall be advanced by coring atleast
3m further in normal locations and at least 7m further for the case of river
crossing locations with prior approval of the Employer. When the boreholes are
to be terminated in soil strata an additional Standard Penetration Test shall be
Page 18 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 carried out at the termination depth. No extra payment shall be made for
carrying out Standard Penetration Tests.
c) Casing pipe shall be used when collapse of a borehole wall is probable. The
bottom of the casing pipe shall at all times be above the test of sampling level but
not more than 15cm above the borehole bottom. In case of cohesionless soils,
the advancement of the casing pipe shall be such that it does not disturb the soil
to be tested or sampled. The casing shall preferably be advanced by slowly
rotating the casing pipe and not by driving.
d) In-situ tests shall be conducted and undisturbed samples shall be obtained in the
boreholes at intervals specified hereafter. Representative disturbed samples shall
be preserved for conducting various identification tests in the laboratory. Water
table in the bore hole shall be carefully recorded and reported following IS:6935.
No water or drilling mud shall be used while boring above ground water table.
For cohesion less soil below water table, the water level in the borehole shall at
all times be maintained slightly above the water table.
e) The borehole shall be cleaned using suitable tools to the depth of testing or
sampling, ensuring least or minimum disturbance of the soil at the bottom of the
borehole. The process of jetting through an open tube sampler shall not be
permitted. In cohesive soils, the borehole may be cleaned by using a bailer with a
flap valve. Gentle circulation of drilling fluid shall be done when rotary mud
circulation boring is adopted.
f) On completion of the drilling, Contractor shall backfill all boreholes as directed by
the Employer.
4.5.1.2. Auger Boring
Auger boring may be employed in soft to stiff cohesive soils above the water table.
Augers shall be of helical or post hole type and the cuttings brought up by the auger
shall be carefully examined in the field and the description of all strata shall be duly
recorded in the field borelog as per IS:1498. No water shall be introduced from the
top while conducting auger boring.

4.5.1.3. Shell and Auger Boring

4.5.1.3.1. Shell and auger boring may be used in all types of soil which are free from boulders.
For cohesion less soil below ground water table, the water level in the borehole shall
always be maintained at or above ground water level. The use of chisel bits shall be
permitted in hard strata having SPT-N value greater than 100 Chisel bits may also be
used to extend the bore hole through local obstructions such as old construction.
Boulders rocky formations, etc. The requirements in Clause 4.5.1.2 shall apply for
this type of boring also.

Page 19 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
4.5.1.3.2. Rotary method may be used in all types of soil below water table. In this method the
boring is carried out by rotating the bit fixed at the lower end of the drill rod. Proper
care shall be taken to maintain firm contact between the bit and the bottom of the
borehole. Bentonite or drilling mud shall be used as drilling fluid to stabilise and
protect the inside surface of the borehole. Use of percussion tools shall be permitted
in hard clays and in dense sandy deposits.
4.5.2. Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
4.5.2.1. This test shall be conducted in all types of soil deposits encountered within a
borehole, to find the variation in the soil stratification by correlating with the number
of blows required for unit penetration of a standard penetrometer. Structure
sensitive engineering properties of cohesive soils and sifts such as strength and
compressibility shall not be inferred based on SPT values.
4.5.2.2. The test shall be conducted at every change of stratum or at interval of not more
than 1.5 m whichever is less as per IS: 2131-1981 , for a depth up to 10 m in case of
normal soils and 40 m in case of special locations.
4.5.2.3. The Equipments, accessories and procedures for conducting the test shall conform to
IS:2131 and IS:9640. The test shall be conducted immediately after reaching to the
test depth and cleaning of bore hole.
4.5.2.4. The test shall be carried out by driving a standard split spoon sampler in the bore
hole by means of hammer of standard weight as specified in IS:2131-1981, having a
free fall of 750 mm. The sample shall be driven using the hammer for 450mm
recording the number of blows for every 150mm. The number of blow for the last
300mm drive shall be reported as N value.
4.5.2.5. This test shall be discontinued when the blow count is equal to 100 or the
penetration is less than 25 mm for 50 blows. At the level where the test is
discontinued, the number of blows and the corresponding penetration shall be
reported. Sufficient quantity of disturbed soil samples shall be collected from the
split spoon sampler for identification and laboratory testing. The sample shall be
visually classified and recorded at the site as well as properly preserved without loss
of moisture content and labeled.
4.5.3. Sampling
4.5.3.1. General
a) Sufficient number of soil samples shall be collected. Disturbed soil samples shall
be collected for soil identification and for conducting tests such as sieve analysis,
index properties, specific gravity, chemical analysis etc. Undisturbed samples shall
be collected to estimate the physical bearing capacity and settlement properties
of the soil.

Page 20 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 b) All accessories and sampling methods shall conform to IS:2132: all disturbed and
undisturbed samples collected in the field shall be classified as per IS:1498.
c) All samples shall be identified with date, borehole or test pit number, depth of
sampling, etc. The top surface of the sample in-situ shall also be marked. Care
shall be taken to keep the core and box samples vertical, with the mark directing
upwards. The tube samples shall be properly trimmed at one end and suitably
capped and sealed with molten paraffin wax. The Contractor shall be responsible
for packing, storing in a cool place and transporting all the samples from site to
the laboratory within seven days after sampling with probe, protection against
loss and damage.
4.5.3.2. Disturbed Samples
a) Disturbed soil samples shall be collected in boreholes at regular intervals. The
weight of sample as per table 2 of IS: 1892-1979 shall be collected at 0.5m
intervals starting from a depth of 0.5m below ground level and at every
identifiable change of strata to supplement the boring records. Samples shall be
stored immediately in air tight jars which shall be filled to capacity as much as
possible.
b) In designated borrow areas, bulk samples, from a depth of about 0.5m below
ground level shall be collected to establish the required properties for use as a fill
material. Disturbed samples weighing about 25kg (250N) shall be collected at
shallow depths and immediately stored in polythene bags as per IS:1892. The
bags shall be sealed properly to preserve the natural moisture content of the
sample and placed in wooden boxes for transportation.
4.5.3.3. Undisturbed Samples
In each borehole undisturbed samples shall be collected at every change in stratum
or at intervals not more than 1.5 m, whichever is less as per IS:2132-1986, for a depth
up to 10 m in case of normal soils and 40 m in case of special locations.

4.5.3.3.1. The spacing between the top levels of undisturbed sampling and standard
penetration testing shall not be less than 1.0m. Undisturbed samples shall be of
100mm diameter and 450mm in length. Samples shall be collected in a manner to
preserve the structure and moisture content of the soil Accessories and sampling
procedures shall conform to IS:1892 and IS:2132
a) Undisturbed sampling in cohesive soil :
Undisturbed samples in soft to stiff cohesive soils shall be obtained using a thin
walled sampler. In order to reduce the wall friction, suitable precautions, such as
oiling the surfaces shall be taken. The sampling tube shall have a smooth finish
on both surfaces and a minimum effective length of 450mm. The area ratio of

Page 21 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 sampling tubes shall be less than 12.5%. However, in case of very stiff soils area
ratio up to 20% shall be permitted.
b) Undisturbed sampling in very loose, saturated, sandy and silty soils and very soft
clays :
Samples shall be obtained using a piston sampler consisting of a cylinder and
piston system. In soft clays and silty clays, with water standing in the casing pipe,
piston sampler shall be used to collect undisturbed samples in the presence of
expert supervision.
Accurate measurements of the sampling depth, dimensions of sampler, stroke
and length of sample recovery shall be recorded. After the sampler is pushed to
the required depth, the cylinder and piston system shall be drawn up together,
preventing disturbance and changes in moisture content of the sample;
c) Undisturbed sampling in cohesion less soils
Undisturbed samples in cohesion less soils shall be obtained in accordance with
IS:8763. Sampler operated by compressed air shall be used to sample cohesion
less soils below ground water table.
4.5.4. Ground Water
4.5.4.1. One of the following methods shall be adopted for determining the elevation of
ground water table in boreholes as per IS:6935 and the instructions of the Employer:
a) In permeable soils, the water level in the borehole shall be allowed to stabilize
after depressing it adequately by bailing before recording its level. Stability of
sides and bottom of the boreholes shall be ensured at all times.
b) For both permeable and impermeable soils, the following method shall be
suitable. The borehole shall be filled with water and then bailed out to various
depths. Observations on the rise or fall of water level shall be made at each
depth. The level at which neither fall nor rise is observed shall be considered the
water table elevation and confirmed by three successive readings of water level
taken at two hours interval.
4.5.4.2. If any variation of the ground water level is observed in any specific boreholes, the
water level in these boreholes shall be recorded during the course of the field
investigation. Levels in nearby wells, streams, etc., if any, shall also be noted in
parallel.
4.5.4.3. Subsoil water samples
a) Subsoil water samples shall be collected for performing chemical analysis.
Representative ground water samples shall be collected when first encountered
in boreholes and before the addition of water to aid boring or drilling.

Page 22 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 b) Chemical analysis of water samples shall include determination of pH value,
turbidity, sulphate, carbonate, nitrate and chloride contents, presence of organic
matter and suspended solids. Chemical preservatives may be added to the
sample for cases as specified in the test methods or in applicable Indian
Standards. This shall only be done if analysis cannot be conducted within an hour
of collection and shall have the prior written permission and approval of the
Employer.
4.5.5. Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (only at Special locations)
a) With bentonite slurry
Dynamic cone penetration test shall be conducted to predict stratification,
density, bearing capacity of granular soils, etc. The test shall be conducted to the
specified depth or refusal, whichever comes first. Refusal shall be considered
when the blow count exceeds 100 for 300mm penetration. Equipment,
accessories test procedures, field observations and reporting of results shall
conform to IS:4968, Part-II. The driving system shall comprise of hammer of
standard weight as specified in IS: 4968 (Part-II) – 1976, having a free fall of
750mm. The cone shall be of 600 and of 62.5mm diameter provided with vents for
continuous flow of bentonite slurry through the cone and rods in order to avoid
friction between the rods and soil. On completion of the test the results shall be
presented as a continuous record of the number of blows required for every
300mm penetration of the cone into the soil in a suitable chart supplemented by
a graphical plot of blow count for 300mm penetration vs. depth. On completion
of the test, the results shall be presented on the proforma approved by the
Employer.
b) Without bentonite slurry
This test shall be conducted with 50mm diameter 60 0 cone fitted loosely to the
driving rod through a cone adopter. The cone shall be driven in to the soil by
allowing hammer of standard weight as specified in IS: 4968 (Part-II) – 1976,
having a free fall of 750mm. The number of blows for every 100mm penetrations
shall be recorded. The process shall be repeated till the cone is driven to the
required depth. The penetration depth shall be limited to 5m in cohesion less soil
and 10m in mixed soil with some binding material. The cone driving rods, driving
head, hoisting equipment shall conform to IS: 10589. The test report should be
prepared as per guidelines of IS: 4968 (Part I).
4.5.6. Vane Shear Test. (required for boreholes where UDS is not possible) (Only at
Special Locations)
Field vane shear test shall be performed inside the borehole to determine the shear
strength and bearing capacity of cohesive soils, especially of soft and sensitive clays,
which are highly susceptible to sampling disturbance. Equipment, accessories, test
procedures, field observations shall correspond to IS:4434. Tests may also be
Page 23 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 conducted by direct penetration from ground surface. If the cuttings at the test
depth in the borehole show any presence of gravel, sand shells, decomposed wood,
etc., which are likely to influence the test results substantially, the test at that
particular depth may be omitted with the permission of the Employer. However, the
test shall be conducted at a depth where these obstructions cease to occur. On
completion of the test, the results shall be reported in an approved proforma as
specified in IS:4434, Appendix - A.
4.6 Field Investigation for Rock
4.6.1. Rock Drilling
4.6.1.1. If, during the investigations, large hard fragments or natural rock beds are
encountered, work shall proceed with core drilling methods. The equipment and
procedures for this operation shall conform to IS:1892. The starting depth of drilling
in rock shall be certified by the Employer. At the end of the investigation, the hole
drilled in rock shall be backfilled with grout consisting of 1 part cement and 3 parts
sand by weight.
4.6.1.2. Drilling shall be carried out with NX size tungsten carbide (TC) or diamond tipped drill
bits, depending on the type of rock and according to IS:6926. Suitable type of drill bit
(TC/Diamond) and core catchers shall be used to ensure continuous and good core
recovery. Core barrels and core catchers shall be used for breaking off the core and
retaining it when the rods are withdrawn. Double tube core barrels shall be used to
ensure better core recovery and to retrieve cores from layers of bedrock. Water shall
be circulated continuously in the hollow rods and the sludge conveying the rock
cuttings to the surface shall be collected. A very high core recovery ratio shall be
aimed at in order to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed sample. Attempt shall be
made to recover cores of 1.5m in length. Normally TC bit shall be used. Change over
to a diamond bit shall require the specific written approval of the Employer, and his
decision as to whether a TC or a diamond bit is to be used shall be final and binding
on Contractor.
4.6.1.3. No drilling run shall exceed 1.5 m in depth. if the core recovery is less than 80% in any
run, the length of the subsequent run shall be reduced to 0.75m. During drilling
operations observations on return water, rate of penetration etc. shall be made
recorded and recorded as per IS:5313.
a) The colour of return water at regular intervals, the depth at which any change of
colour of return water is observed, the depth of occurrence and amount of flow
of hot water, if encountered, shall be recorded.
b) The depth through which a uniform rate of penetration was maintained, the
depth at which marked change in rate of penetration or sudden fail on drill rod
occurs, the depth at which any blockage of drill bit causing core loss, if any, shall
be recorded.

Page 24 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 c) Any heavy vibration or torque noticed during the drilling should be recorded
together with the depth of occurrence.
d) Special conditions like the depth at which grouting was done during, drilling,
presence of artesian conditions, loss of drilling fluid, observations of gas discharge
with return water, etc., shall also be observed and recorded.
e) All the observations and other details shall be recorded as per daily drill and
reported in a proforma as given in IS:5313, Appendix A.
4.6.2. Core Sampling
4.6.2.1. Core samples shall be extracted by the application of a continuous pressure at one
end of the core with the barrel held horizontally without vibration. Friable cores shall
be extracted from the barrel directly into a suitably sized half round plastic channel
section. Care shall be taken to extrude the samples in the direction of coring to avoid
stress reversal.
4.6.2.2. Immediately after withdrawal from the core barrel, the cores shall be placed in a tray
and transferred to boxes specially prepared for this purpose. The boxes shall be
made from seasoned timber or any other durably material and shall be indexed on
top of the lid according to IS:4078. The cores shall be numbered serially and
arranged in the boxes in a sequential order. The description of the core samples shall
be recorded as instructed in IS:4464. Where no core is recovered, it shall be recorded
as specified in the standard. Continuous record of core recovery and rock quality
designation (RD/DD/QD) are to be mentioned in the bore log in accordance with
IS:11315(Part-II).
4.7 Laboratory Testing
4.7.1. Essential Requirements
a) Depending on the types of substrata encountered, appropriate laboratory tests
shall be conducted on soil and rock samples collected in the field. Laboratory
tests shall be scheduled and performed by qualified and experienced personnel
who are thoroughly conversant with the work. Tests indicated in the schedule of
items shall be performed on soil, water and rock samples as per relevant IS codes.
One copy of all laboratory test data records shall be submitted to Employer
progressively every week. Laboratory tests shall be carried out concurrently with
the field investigations as initial laboratory test results could be useful in planning
the later stages of field work. A schedule of laboratory tests shall be established
by Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer within one week of completion
of the first borehole;
b) Laboratory tests shall be conducted using approved apparatus complying with the
requirements and specification of Indian Standards or other approved standards
for this type of work. It shall be checked that the apparatus are in good working
condition before starting the laboratory tests. Calibration of all the instruments
Page 25 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 and their accessories shall be done carefully and precisely at an approved
laboratory.
c) All samples, whether undisturbed or disturbed shall be extracted, prepared and
examined by competent personnel properly trained and experienced in soil
sampling. examination, testing and in using the apparatus in conformance with
the specified standards;
d) Undisturbed soil samples retained in liners or seamless tube samplers shall be
removed, without causing any disturbance to the samples, using suitably
designed extruders just prior to actual testing. If the extruder is horizontal,
proper support shall be provided to prevent the sample from breaking. For screw
tube extruders, the pushing head shall be free from the screw shaft so that no
torque is applied to the soil sample in contact with the pushing head. For soft
clay samples, the sample tube shall be cut by means of a high speed hacksaw to
proper test length and placed over the mould before pushing the sample into it
with a suitable piston;
e) While extracting a sample from a liner or tube, care shall be taken to assure that
its direction of movement is the same as that during sampling to avoid stress
reversal;
4.7.2. Tests
4.7.2.1. Tests as indicated in these specifications and as may be requested by the Employer,
shall be conducted. These tests shall include but may not be limited to the following :
a) Tests of undisturbed and disturbed samples
 Visual and engineering classification;
 Sieve analysis and hydrometric analysis;
 Liquid, plastic and shrinkage limits;
 Specific gravity;
 Chemical analysis
 Swell pressure and free swell index determination
 Proctor compaction test.
b) Tests of undisturbed samples:
 Bulk density and moisture content;
 Relative density(for sand),
 Unconfined compression test;
 Box shear test (for sand);
Page 26 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
  Triaxial shear tests (depending on the type of soil and field conditions on
undisturbed or remoulded samples):
i. Unconsolidated undrained;
ii. Consolidated drained test;
 Consolidation.

c) Tests on rock samples

 Visual classification;
 Moisture content , porosity and density;
 Specific gravity;
 Hardness
 Stake durability
 Unconfined compression test (both saturated and at in-situ water
content);
 Point load strength index;
 Deformability test(both saturated and dry samples).
d) Chemical analysis of sub soil water.
4.7.3. Salient Test Requirement
a) Triaxial shear tests shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples, saturated by
the application of back pressure. Only if the water table is at sufficient depth so
that chances of its rising to the base of the footing are small or nil, the triaxial
tests shall be performed on specimens at natural moisture content. Each test
shall be carried out on a set of three test specimens from one sample at cell
pressures equal to 100, 200 and 300 KPa respectively or as required depending on
the soil conditions:
b) Direct shear test shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples. The three
normal vertical stresses for each test shall be 100, 200 and 300 KPa or as required
for the soil conditions;
c) Consolidation test shall have loading stages of 10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, 400 and
800 KPa. Rebound curve shaft be recorded for all samples by unloading the
specimen at its in-situ stress. Additional rebound curves shall also be recorded
wherever desired by the Employer;
d) Chemical analysis of subsoil shaft include determination of PH value, carbonate,
sulphate (both SO3 and SO4). chloride and nitrate contents, organic matter,

Page 27 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 salinity and any other chemicals which may be harmful to the foundation
material. Their contents in the soil shall be indicated as percentage(%);
e) Chemical analysis of subsoil water samples shall include the determination of
properties such as colour, odour, turbidity, PH value and specific conductivity, the
last two chlorides, nitrates, organic matter and any other chemical harmful to the
foundation material. The chemical contents shall be indicated as parts per million
(PPM) based on weight.

4.8 Geotechnical Investigation Report

4.8.1. General
Contractor shall submit a formal report containing geological information of the
region, procedures adopted for geotechnical investigation, field observations,
summarised test data, conclusions and recommendations. The report shall also
include detailed bore logs, subsoil sections, field test results, laboratory
observations and test results both in tabular as well as graphical form, practical
and theoretical considerations for the interpretation of test results, supporting
calculations for the conclusions drawn, etc. Initially, Contractor shall submit
three copies of the report in draft form for Employer’s review;
a) Contractor’s Geotechnical engineer shall visit Employer’s Corporate Office for a
detailed review based on Employer’s comments in order to discuss the nature of
modifications, if any, to be done in the draft report. Contractor shall incorporate
in the report the agreed modifications and resubmit the revised draft report for
approval. Ten copies of the detailed final approved report shall be submitted to
Employer together with one set of reproducible of the graphs, tables etc.
b) The detailed final report based on field observations, in-situ and laboratory tests
shall encompass theoretical as well as practical considerations for foundations for
different types of structures.
4.8.2. Data to be furnished
4.8.2.1. The report shall also include the following
a) A plot plant/location plan showing the locations and reduced levels of all field test
e.g. boreholes, trial pits, static cone penetration tests, dynamic cone penetration
tests, etc., property drawn to scale and dimensioned with reference to the
established grid lines;
b) A true cross section of all individual boreholes and test pits with reduced levels
and co-ordinates showing the classification and thickness of individual stratum,
position of ground water table, various in-situ tests conducted, samples collected
at different depths and the rock stratum, if encountered;

Page 28 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 c) Geological information of the area including geomorphology, geological structure,
lithology, stratigraphy and tectonics, core recovery and rock quality designation
(RD/DD/QD), etc.,
d) Observations and data regarding change of course of rivers, velocity, scour
depths, slit factor, etc., and history of flood details for mid stream and river bank
locations;
e) Past observations and historical data, if available, for the area or for other areas
with similar soil profile, or with similar structures in the surrounding areas;
f) Plot of Standard Penetration Test (uncorrected and corrected N values) with
depth for each test site;
g) Results of all laboratory test summarised according to Table 4.0 (i) for each
sample as well as (ii) for each layer, along with all the relevant charts, tables,
graphs, figures, supporting calculations, conclusions and photographs of
representative rock cores,
h) For all triaxial shear tests, stress vs. strain diagrams as well as Mohr’s circle
envelopes shall be furnished. If back pressure is applied for saturation, the
magnitude of the same shall be indicated. The value of modulus of elasticity (E)
shall be furnished for all tests along with relevant calculations;
i) For all consolidation tests, the following curves shall be furnished
i. e vs. log p;
ii. e vs. p;
iii. Compression vs log t or vst
depending upon the shape of the plot, for proper determination of coefficient of
consolidation.
The point showing the initial condition (e0, p0) of the soil shall be marked on the
curves;
j) The procedure adopted for calculating the compression index from the field curve
and settlement of soil strata shall be clearly specified. The time required for 50%
and 90% primary consolidation along with secondary settlements, if significant,
shall also be calculated.

Page 29 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Table 4.0

A. SUMMARY OF RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTS ON SOIL

Date of Boring : Name of the Project : B or e h o le n o . :

Ground elevation: Co-ordinates: Termination Depth: Water table:

(R.L. in m.)
3
Soil details Grain Size Atterberg Soil Density (kg / m ) Moisture Triaxial / Remarks
Distribution limits content Direct shear
Test

Bulk / Natural Density

IS Classification of soil

N – Value (corrected)
N – Value (observed)
Description of layers

Submerged Density
Sample nos. & type

Confining Pressure

Angle of Repose
Relative Density
Proctor Density
Specific Gravity

Plasticity index
Plastic Limit
Liquid Limit

Dry Density

Co-hesion
Optimum
Natural
Gravel
Depth

Sand

Clay
Silt

Following additional information should also be provided:

(i) Maximum expected yearly rise / fall of water table

(ii) General topography of the location : whether cultivated or barren, hilly / plain location, river bank location etc.

Note : where ever undisturbed sampling is not possible, reasons must be clearly indicated and all the tests shall be conducted
on re-moulded samples

(Signature) (Signature) (Signature)

Prepared by Checked & Reviewed by Checked & Approved by
Soil investigator Line Contractor POWERGRID Site / RHQ Engg.

Page 30 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 B. SUMMARY OF ULTIMATE BEARING CAPACITIES CONSIDERING MAXIMUM RISE OF WATER
TABLE

Location Foundation Depth of Size of Bearing capacity*

no. Classification footing footing Based on Based on
considered considered settlement shear
for bearing for bearing criteria (for failure
capacity capacity 40mm total criteria
calculation calculation settlement)
3.0m 3.0m x 3.0m
3.0m 5.0m x 5.0m
3.0m 7.0m x 7.0m
3.0m 9.0m x 9.0m
3.5m 3.0m x 3.0m
3.5m 5.0m x 5.0m
3.5m 7.0m x 7.0m
3.5m 9.0m x 9.0m

* Detailed calculations of all the bearing capacities should be enclosed with soil
investigation reports.

(Signature) (Signature) (Signature)

Prepared by Checked & Reviewed by Checked & Approved by
Soil investigator Line Contractor POWERGRID Site / RHQ Engg.

C. For Chemical Test

As per Specifications - Clause 4.8.4

4.8.3. Recommendations
4.8.3.1. Recommendations shall be provided for each tower location duly considering soil
type and tower spotting data. The recommendations shall provide all design
parameters and considerations required for proper selection, dimensioning and
future performance of tower foundations and the following
a) The subsurface material must provide safe bearing capacity and uplift resistance
by incorporating appropriate safety factors thereby avoiding rupture under
ultimate loads;

Page 31 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 b) Movement of the foundation, including short and long term components under
transient and permanent loading, shall be strictly controlled with regard to
settlement, uplift, lateral translation and rotation:
c) Co-efficient of permeability of various sub soil and rock strata based on in-situ
permeability tests.
Core resistance, frictional resistance total resistance, relation between core
resistance, Standard Penetration Test N value, and settlement analysis for
different sizes of foundation as specified in para 4.1.8.3 (I) based on static cone
penetration test.
d) For shallow foundation the following shall be indicated with comprehensive
supporting calculations:
i. Net Safe allowable bearing pressure for isolated square footing of sizes 4.0,
5.0, 6.0 & 7. m at three different founding depths of 1,2 and 3 & 3.5m below
ground level considering both shear failure and settlement criteria giving
reasons for type of shear failure adopted in the calculation.
ii. Net safe allowable bearing pressure for raft foundations of widths greater
than 5m at 2.0, 3.0 and 4.0m below ground level considering both shear
failure and settlement criteria.
iii. Rate and magnitude of settlement expected of the structure.
iv. Net safe bearing capacity for foundation sizes mentioned in para(i) above,
modulus of sub grade reaction, modules of elasticity from plate load test
results along with time settlement curves and load settlement curve in both
natural and log graph, variation of Modulus of sub grade reaction with size,
shape and depth of foundation.

e) The stable slopes for shallow and deep excavations, active and passive earth
pressure at rest and angle of repose for sandy soils shall be furnished. The
loading of the foundations shall not compromise the stability of the surrounding
subsurface materials and the stability of the foundation shall be ensured against
sliding or overturning:-
f) Depending on the subsurface material, water table level and tower type, either
reinforced concrete isolated pad and chimney, cast-in-situ bored pile of special
foundations shall be installed at a given location.
g) Net Safe allowable bearing pressure and uplift resistance shall be provided for the
various sizes of isolated square footings founded at various depths below ground
level considering both shear failure and movement criteria; rate and magnitude
of movement expected of the structure (settlement, uplift, rotation) shall also be
given.
h) In cases where normal open cast/pile foundations appear to be impractical,
special pile foundations shall be given due consideration along with the following:
Page 32 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 i. Type of pile foundation and reasons for recommending the same duly
considering the soil characteristics.
ii. Suitable founding strata for the pile:
iii. Estimated length of pile for 500, 750 and 1000 KN and 4500 KN capacities;
end bearing and frictional resistance shall be indicated separately:
iv. Magnitude of negative skin friction or uplift forces due to soil swelling.
i) Where the subsoil water and soil properties are found to be chemically
aggressive. Contractor shall take suitable precautions during construction
including any protective coating to be applied on the foundations; susceptibility
of soil to termite action and remedial measures for the same shall be dealt with;
j) Suitability of locally available soils at site for filling, backfilling and adequate
compaction shall be investigated.
k) If expansive soil such as black cotton soil is encountered recommendation of
removal or retainment of the same shall be given in the latter case, detailed
specifications of special requirements shall also be given;
l) Susceptibility of subsoil strata to liquefaction in the event of earthquake and
remedial measures, if required, shall be considered.
m) Any other information of special significance such as dewatering schemes, etc.
which may have a bearing on the design and construction shall be provided.
n) Recommendations for additional soil investigations, beyond the scope of the
present work, shall be given if Contractor considers such investigations necessary.
4.8.4. Hydrogeological Conditions
4.8.4.1. The maximum elevation of ground water table, amplitudes of its fluctuations and
data on water aggressivity with regard to foundation structure materials shall be
reported. While preparing ground water characteristics the following parameters
should be specified for each acquifier:
a) bicarbonate alkalinity mg-eq/(deg),
b) pH value
c) content of aggressive carbon dioxide, mg/l;
d) content of magnesia salts. mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions Mg+2;
e) content of ammonia salts, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions NH4+
f) content of caustic alkalis, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions Na+ and K+
g) contents of chlorides,mg/l recalculated in terms of ions Cl-
h) contents of sulphates, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions SO4-2
i) aggregate content of chlorides, sulphates, nitrates, carbonates and other salts.
mg/l.
4.9 Rates and Measurements
4.9.1. Rates
Page 33 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 The contractor’s quoted rates shall be inclusive of making observations, establishing
the ground level and co-ordinates at the location of each borehole, test pit etc. No
extra payments shall be made for conducting Standard Penetration Test, collecting,
packing, transporting of all samples and cores, recording and submittal of results on
approved formats.
4.10 Specific Requirements for Geotechnical Investigation at River Crossings.
4.10.1. The entire soil investigation work at river crossing locations (if required) shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant parts of the specifications for
geotechnical investigation modified to the extent given below.
4.10.2. Requirements
4.10.2.1. Boreholes shall be executed to specified depth of 40m (refer clause 4.5.1.1 b). If
refusal strata is reached (i.e. SPT-N value is greater than 100 continuously for 5m
depth) with characteristics of rock the borehole may be terminated at shallower
depth i.e. at 5m in refusal strata, with prior approval of the Employer.
4.10.2.2. Laboratory testing shall be conducted on all soil samples to determine grain size
distribution, liquid limit and plastic limit of the different soil strata encountered.
4.10.2.3. Geotechnical Report must furnish the following:
a) Geotechnical investigation scheme;
b) Bore-logs indicating soil stratification, with IS classification, sampling details and
SPI ‘N’ values.
c) Soil cross-sections along various boreholes in two orthogonal directions indicating
soil stratification based on field and laboratory tests;
d) Grain size distribution curves.
e) IS classification of soils.
f) Shear tests (UU) to be done on saturated soil samples;
g) Bearing capacity of soil at different levels;
h) Highest flood level (H.F.L.);
i) Maximum discharge, velocity etc. (from authenticated source such as CWC or
appropriate State authorities)
j) Recommendations regarding type of foundation to be adopted at the location.
4.10.3. A check list for reporting results of river crossing locational details, detailed soil
investigation and river values for river crossing locations is enclosed at Annexure-C.
4.11 Special Terms and conditions for Geotechnical Investigation in the River bed
4.11.1. Contractor is required to mobilise a suitable arrangement (floating pontoon, plant,
equipment etc) to carry out geotechnical investigation work in creek/river locations
identified by the Employer.
4.11.2. In the event of storm or stoppage of work, etc., Contractor shall not be paid extra for
mobilization / remobilisation of floating pontoon, plant, equipment, etc.
Page 34 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
4.11.3. Contractor shall fully satisfy himself about the conditions of creek/river (depth of
water, wave currents, wind conditions, etc.) prevailing in the area of proposed
investigation and plan the necessary tools and plant to be deployed before quoting.
Any claim resulting from lack of data collection in this respect shall not be
entertained.
4.11.4. Contractor shall make his own arrangements for locating the coordinates and
position of boreholes in creek/river with respect to two grid-lines indicated by
Employer.
4.11.5. Boring in creek or river shall be payable only below the bed level and no payment
shall be made for lowering the casing in water.
4.11.6. Contractor shall arrange for necessary transportation on water (e.g. motor boat) to
facilitate the supervision of work by officials of Employer at its own cost.
4.11.7. Full details of the construction plant, proposed working method for boring and
sampling in water shall be submitted along with the Tender.
4.11.8. The unit rate quoted for underwater boring shall include complete work required as
per specification and no separate payment shall be made on any account.
5. STATUTORY REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
5.1 Contractor is required to follow statutory regulations stipulated in Electricity Act
2003, Indian Electricity Rules and other local rules & regulations.
5.2 The codes and standards referred to in these specifications shall govern. In case of a
conflict between such codes/standards and these specifications, the provisions of the
specifications shall prevail. Such codes, standards referred to shall mean latest
revisions, amendments, changes adopted and published by relevant agencies.
5.3 Other Internationally acceptable standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than those specified shall also be acceptable.

Page 35 of35
SECTION- III, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto Oct-2018)
 Annexure-B
FORMAT FOR REPORTING DETAILS OF POLLUTED STRECHES OF TRANSMISSION LINES:

Project: Name Of Line: Voltage Leve (kV) Total Line Length (Kms.):

Sl Section Details Source of Distance Details Source of Distance Details of pollution measurement Details of existing lines in vicinity w.r.t
no. Pollution ( of source undertaken on dummy insulators viz insulator design, performance &
Indicate of pollution measurement
S.no. of Pollution
source) from line
section
From To Length No. of Details of Dummy Periodicity SDD NSDD Voltag No. & Performa Rem
of Line Suspensi Insulators of (mg/cm2) (mg/cm2) e Level Type of nce arks
Section on Measureme Insulators (Indicate ***
Towers nt per Susp. Category
String )**
Dia Spacing Creep
(mm) (mm) age
(mm)

* Source of pollution -(a): sea, (b): power stations, (c): cement factories, (d): Fertiliser plants, (e): oil refineries, (f): brick kilns, (g):Coal mines, (h): salt farms, (i)
bird drops near butcheries/ . sanctuaries, (j): fertlisers, (k): soil with high salt content, (I): Any other (Please mention)

** Performance category -(I): Satisfactory, (2): Ocassional tripouts, (3): Frequent tripollts/ line drops

***Remarks – Indicate additional information like special maintenance practices followed, levels of pollution measurements if carried out etc.

For further details please refer the following Format

SECTION - III (Part-2) VOLUME-II

QUESTIONNAIRE FOR COLLECTION OF POLLUTION DATA IN RESPECT OF TRANSMISSION LINES

1. Distance from sea-Coast (Route alignment indicating distances from sea coast may be :
enclosed)
2. Details of industries along the proposed route (Power stations, Cement factories, Fertiliser :
plants, Oil refineries Brick-klins, Coal mines, Salt Forn1s etc.)
a. Type of Industry :

b. Distance from the proposed route (please mark position of industries in the route :
map)
c. Nature of pollutants. :

d. Details of stretches of lines (in kms) expected to be affected by above industries). :

3. Details of proposed industries along the Proposed route (Data may be collected From :
concerned authorities)
4. Details of existing lines in the vicinity Of proposed route alignment :

a. Name of line, voltage level, Utility :

b. How long in service. :

c. Type of insulators used (Standard! Antifog) :

d. Details of insulator strings . (Nos. per string) :

e. Has ever pollution measurement carried out by the utility. :

f. Any specific steps being taken to counter pollution problems (Like hot line :
washing, insulator surface coating, cleaning of insulators etc.)

g. Performance of line (No. of ; tripouts/flashovers, failure of insulators etc. as :

collected from concerned utiluty)

h. Approx. distance between the Line and proposed route. :

i. Any other information (Corrosion of insulator pin, towers, line drops etc.) :

5. Any butcheries / Bird sanctuaries along the route Alignment where bird drops may be :
anticipated (indicate position of the route map)

6. Vicinity of highways :

a. Distance from proposed route. :

b. Length of parallelism :

7. Any specific area along the route alignment where soil may have salt content which may :
affect the insulator performance (Identify area on route maps)

8. Details of cultivated fields where fertilisers are frequently used (Identify areas on the route :
maps)

SECTION - III (Part-2) VOLUME-II

 9. Details of natural rain :

a. Duration of rainy season :

b. Extent of rain. :

10. Details of thunderstorm conditions (Very frequent/frequent/less frequent) :

11. Details of Pollution measurement if any, carried out using dummy insulators/ existing lines :
nearby:-

i. Measurement conducted on insulator - Type, dia, spacing & creepage :

ii. SDD , :

iii. NSDD :

iv. Type of pollutant :

v. Periodicity of measurement: Values corresponding to :

a. Quaterly :

b. Half yearly :

c. Yearly :

d. Two yearly :

12. Any other information. :

SECTION - III (Part-2) VOLUME-II

 Annexure-C

FORMAT FOR REPORTING RESULTS OF SURVEY OF RIVER CROSSING STRETCH OF

TRANSMISSION LINE

Inputs:

River crossing profile, ground profile, GL, HFL, Tower type, Reference bench mark details:

- Base width
- Slope
- Loads
- Stub sections/ Leg sections

Soil Report (up to 40m. depth)

- N Value
- Cohesion © and friction angle (Ø)
- Dry Density & Submerged density of soil
- Soil composition including bore log data.
- Soil Strata distribution details depth wise
- R.L of ground (Soil investigation and foundation location)
- Mean grain size
- Silt factor calculations
- Scour depth calculations
- Special Recommendations, if any.
- River crossing profile showing the position of R.C towers and Anchor towers
with span details.
- Any other details like bunds, roads, bridges etc. with their R.L.S.

River Values

- Max. discharge
- Max. velocity (Vmax.)
- HFL
- Clear water way
- River Meandering history.
- Navigable/ Non Navigable
- Location reference of above River values for crossing details.
- River bed level. (RL)

SECTION - III(Part-2) VOLUME-II

Page 1 of 1 of Annexure C
 Annexure-D

FIELD QUALITY PLAN FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

Document No. C/A/DA/QA&I/SFQP/TL/030, Rev 01

S.No. Descriptio Items to be Tests/Checks Ref documents Check/Testing Counter Accepting

n of Checked to be done Check/Test authority in
Activity By Employer Employer
Agency Extent
1. Detailed a. Route Optimisation of a. Preliminary Contractor 100% at Field 100% based Project
Survey alignment route length survey. on record incharge
b. Topographical - do - - do - docuements
map
- do - - do -
c. Tower
- do -
spotting datas
given by
Engg.
b. Route 1. Ground a. Sag template Contractor - do - 100% based Line
profiling & clearance. b. Tower on record incharge
tower spotting 2. Cold Wt. Spotting data - do - - do - documents
Span - do -
c. Route
3. Hot Wt. - do - - do - - do -
alignment
Span
4. Sum of Adj - do - - do - - do -
span (wind
span)
5. Angle of - do - - do - - do -
Devn.

SECTION - III (Part-2), VOLUME-II

Page 1 of 2 of Annexure D
2 Check Tower Location & i. Alignment a. Route Contractor 100% at Field i). All angle Section
Survey Final Length ii. Final Length alignment towers in Incharge
b. Tower plains and
Schedule 50% in hilly
c. Profile terrains

ii).Final
length to be
checked on
100% basis
based on
records/docu
ments

3. Details Soil a. Borelog 1. Depth of As per Employer Contractor 100% at Field To witness Section
Investigati bore log. Specification 20% at Field incharge.
on 2. SPT Test
3. Collection of
samples
b. Tests on samples As per tech. - do - Lab appd 100% by Review of lab Line
Specs by testing lab test results incharge
Employer based on the
report
review by
CC Engg.

SECTION - III (Part-2), VOLUME-II

Page 1 of 2 of Annexure D
 Annexure-E
Page 1 of 2
FORMAT-1
FORMAT FOR OWNERSHIP DATA FOR LAND SCHEDULING FOR TOWER BASE
Name of Transmission line:

State & District:

Tehsil/circle:

Loc No. ………………………. Tower Type………………………………….. Tower Base Area *……………………………..Sqm.

S.No Owner Occupied Mouza/ Tehsil/ Sheet Plot Khata Total Area Kissam/Type Circle Rate Remarks on land
Name owner Village Circle no. No. No/ Khata of land /Land (Rs.)per SqM use / Any
(as per name at Khasra No./Khasra use (farming/ dispute/court
land site if No. No.(in waste/ case over land
records) any SqM) residential
(kabza) etc.
1
2

Note:

1. Tower base area (between four legs) shall be calculated in ....…………Sqm (as per MoP guidelines) or as per prevailing /local authority compensation
norms.
2. Separate table as per above to be generated for each locations.
3. Any additional data to implement the compensation may be provided.
 Annexure-E
Page 2 of 2
FORMAT-2
FORMAT FOR OWNERSHIP DATA FOR LAND SCHEDULING FOR ROW CORRIDOR LENGTH
Name of Transmission line:

State & District:

Tehsil/circle:

Loc No. From ……………To..………… , Span Length ………………M , Total ROW area of span *……………………………..Sqm.

S.No Owner Occupied Mouza/ Tehsil/ Sheet Plot Khata Total Area Kissam/Type Circle Rate Remarks on land
Name owner Village Circle no. No. No/ Khata of land /Land (Rs.)per SqM use / Any
(as per name at Khasra No./Khasra use (farming/ dispute/court
land site if No. No.(in waste/ case over land
records) any SqM) residential
(kabza) etc.
1
2

Note:

1 Area should be calculated in the width of ROW corridor (excluding tower base area considered for tower ) for each span.…………Sqm . or as per
prevailing /local authority compensation norms.
2 Separate table as per above to be generated for each span.
3 Any additional data to implement the compensation may be provided .
SECTION-IV
 SECTION-IV

CONTENTS

Clause Description Page No.

1.0 Transmission Tower 1
2.0 Foundations 24
3.0 Tower Erection, Stringing and Installation 38
of Line Materials
4.0 Field Quality Plan 49
5.0 Manufacturing Quality Plan 49
Pre – Commissioning procedures for Appendix – I
Transmission lines.
Field Quality Plan for Transmission lines Appendix – II
Manufacturing Quality Plan for Appendix – III
Transmission lines
 SECTION IV
TOWER, FOUNDATION, ERECTION, STRINGING
AND COMMISSIONING OF LINE
1.0 Transmission Tower
The general description of towers applicable for the package and technical
particulars thereof are indicated in Section – I of this Specification.
1.1 Design and Drawings
1.1.1 The relevant drawings for all the towers and their extensions shall be furnished
to the Contractor by the Employer which shall include structural
drawings/erection drawings and / or shop fabrication drawings, Bill of Materials
for all the towers and their extensions as well as construction drawings for
foundations.
1.1.2 The tower members can be directly fabricated from the structural/erection
drawings wherever the required fabrication details are provided on the same or
shop fabrication drawings. However, if the contractor is required to prepare
shop fabrication drawings, of their own, in addition to the structural/ erection
drawings with required fabrication details, they may prepare the same without
any additional financial implication to Employer.

Proto Assembly :

(i) Contractors, who have not done the proto-assembly of the towers / tower
extensions or have not supplied the same towers / tower extensions against
any earlier POWERGRID’s project, shall before taking up mass fabrication,
the Contractor shall arrange for one number proto assembly for each type of
towers and extensions. POWERGRID reserves the right to get the same
witnessed by their representative. After proto-assembly, the contractors,
shall incorporate revisions in the drawings / documents if any on account of
proto corrections, and make necessary endorsement with reference to the
respective packages / Letter of Awards. The revised drawing/documents
shall be submitted in 3 (three) copies for final approval by the Employer.

(ii) The contractors who have already done the proto-assembly of the towers /
tower extensions or have supplied the same towers / tower extensions
against any earlier POWERGRID’s project need not do the proto assembly.
They shall submit documentary evidence viz. proto-inspection reports,
supply records etc. in its support. However, they may do the proto-assembly
for their verification and satisfaction. Further, they shall submit 10 copies of
the structural drawings and BOM of tower / tower extensions after
endorsing the projects name for further distribution by Employer.
Page 1 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 No payment shall be made to the contractor on the account of proto-assembly
in either of the cases mentioned at (i) or (ii).
In any case, the onus of correct fabrication / fitment of tower parts shall lie
with contractor. Any defect, if found during erection at site, the same has to be
rectified by the contractor without any additional financial implication to
POWERGRID.

1.1.3 All the drawings shall have a proper name plate clearly displaying the name of
POWERGRID on right hand bottom corner. The exact format of the nameplate
shall be handed over to the successful bidder for incorporation of the same on
all the drawings. Also all the drawings shall carry the following statement and
shall be displayed conspicuously on the drawing:
WARNING : THIS IS PROPRIETORY ITEM AND DESIGN RIGHT IS STRICTLY
RESERVED WITH POWERGRID. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES THIS DRAWING
SHALL BE USED BY ANYBODY WITHOUT PRIOR PERMISSION FROM THE OWNER
IN WRITING.
1.1.4 While submitting the structural drawings, bill of materials, shop drawings and
any other drawings pertaining to the subject transmission line, the Contractor
shall clearly indicate on each drawing POWERGRID Specification No., Name of
the specific Transmission line and project, letter reference no. and date on
which the submission are made. The same practice is also to be followed while
submitting distribution copies.
1.1.5 The tower accessories drawings like Number plate, Danger plate, phase plate,
Circuit Plate, Step Bolt, Anti-climbing device, pole plate and Earthing
Arrangement have been standardized (except Bird guard) are enclosed in
drawing section of this specification. The contractor is required to submit
distribution copies of the above drawings after endorsing the name of the
projects. However drawing of Bird Guard, D-shackle etc. shall be prepared by
the Contractor and shall be submitted to the Employer, in three (3) copies for
approval. This drawing shall be prepared in A4 size only
1.1.6 The drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be approved/commented by
the Employer as the case may be within fifteen (15) days of receipt of drawings
in his office. If the designs/drawings are commented by the Employer, the
Contractor shall submit revised design/drawings duly incorporating all
comments within fifteen (15) days of date of issue of comments. The
Contractor shall submit 15 copies of all tower accessories for further
distribution by the Employer.
The mass fabrication shall be taken up from the standard shop drawings. The
overall responsibility of fabricating tower members correctly lies with the

Page 2 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Contractor only and the Contractor shall ensure that all the tower members
can be assembled/ fitted while erecting without any undue strain on them.
1.1.7 Other than the items indicated above some other drawings and documents,
such as BOM, Shop drawings, structural drawings for towers/extensions based
on single line diagram given by the Employer, which are required for the
project, shall also be developed by the Contractor. However, no extra cost on
this account shall be payable to the Contractor.
1.2 Materials
1.2.1 Tower Steel Sections
IS Steel Sections of tested quality of conformity with IS:2062:2011 grade E250
(Designated Yield Strength. 250 MPa) and/ or grade E350 (Designated Yield
Strength 350 MPa) are to be used in towers, extensions, stubs and stub setting
templates. For Snow Zone towers MS & HT Steel Sections shall conform to E250
Grade-C & E350 Grade-C respectively. The Contractor can use other equivalent
grade of structural steel angle sections and plates conforming to latest
International Standards viz BSEN 10025. However, use of steel grade having
designated yield strength more than that of EN 10025 grade S355 JR/JO
(designated yield strength 355 MPa) is not permitted, unless otherwise
indicated in this specification.
Steel plates below 6mm size exclusively used for packing plates/packing
washers produced as per IS: 1079 (Grade-0) are also acceptable. However, if
below 6mm size plate are used as load bearing plates viz gusset plates , joint
splices etc. the same shall conform to IS : 2062 or equivalent standard meeting
mechanical strength/metallurgical properties corresponding to grade E250 or
above grade (designated yield strength not more than 355MPa), depending
upon the type of grade incorporated into design. Flats of equivalent grade
meeting mechanical strength/ metallurgical properties may also be used in
place of plates for packing plates/ packing washers. The chequered plates shall
conform to IS : 3502. SAILMA 350HI grade plate can also be accepted in place
of HT plates (EN 10025 grade S355 JR/JO / IS 2062:2011 – grade E350, as
applicable) provided SAILMA 350HI grade plate meet all the mechanical
properties of plate as per EN 10025 grade S355 JR/JO (designated yield
strength 355 MPa) / IS 2062: 2011 – grade E350. While selecting equivalent
grade, requirement of IS:2062 for particular grade has to be fully complied.
Further, material shall be imported from the manufacturers having valid BIS
license.
For designing of towers, preferably rationalised steel sections have been used.
During execution of the project, if any particular section is not available, the
same shall be substituted by higher section/Grade. Any cost on account of the
same shall be borne by the Contractor. However, design approval for such

Page 3 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 substitution shall be obtained from the Employer before any substitution and
records of such substitutions shall be maintained by the Contractor.
1.2.2 Fasteners: Bolts, Nuts and Washers.
1.2.2.1 All tower members shall be joined together with Hexagonal Bolts and nuts. All
hexagonal bolts and nuts shall conform to IS-12427. They shall have hexagonal
head and nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid, truly concentric, and
square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight.
All bolts and nuts shall be galvanized as per IS:1367 (Part-13)/IS:2629.
1.2.2.2 The bolt shall be of 16/24 mm diameter and of property class 5.6 as specified in
IS:1367 (Part-III) and matching nut of property class 5.0 as specified in IS:1367
(Part-VI).
1.2.2.3 Bolts up to M16 and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the bolt
should be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain
good and reliable mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The
shear strength of bolts for 5.6 grade should be 310 MPa minimum as per
IS:12427. Bolts should be provided with washer face in accordance with IS:1363
(Part-I) to ensure proper bearing.
1.2.2.4 Nuts for hexagonal bolts should be double chamfered as per the requirement
of IS:1363 Part-III. It should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should
not be over tapped beyond 0.4mm oversize on effective diameter for size up to
M16.
1.2.2.5 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of bolts shall be such that
the threaded portion will not extend into the place of contact of the members.
1.2.2.6 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded for
enough to permit firm gripping of the members, but not further. It shall be
ensured that the threaded portion of each bolt protrudes not less than 3mm
and not more than 8mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit tight to the
point where the shank of the bolt connects to the head.
1.2.2.7 Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary. Spring washers
shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. These washers shall be steel
electrogalvanised, positive lock type and 3.5mm in thickness for 16mm dia bolt
and 4.5mm for 24mm bolt.
1.6.2.8 To avoid bending stress in bolts or to reduce it to minimum, no bolt shall
connect aggregate thickness of members more than three (3) times its
diameter.
1.2.2.9 The bolt positions in assembled towers shall be as per structural drawing.
1.2.2.10 Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts shall be tightened with
spanners without fouling.

Page 4 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
1.2.2.11 To ensure effective in-process Quality control it is desirable that the
manufacturer should have in house testing facility for all tests like weight of
zinc coating, shear strength and other tests etc. The manufacturer should also
have proper Quality Assurance System which should be in line with the
requirement of this specification and IS: 9001 series Quality System Standard.
1.3 Tower Accessories
Arrangement shall be provided for fixing of all tower accessories to the tower
at a height between 2.5 meters and 3.5 meters above the ground level.
1.3.1 Step Bolts & Ladders
Each tower shall be provided with step bolts as per drawing enclosed in the
section of drawing. The step bolts conforming to IS:10238 of not less than
16mm diameter and 175mm long, spaced not more than 450mm apart and
extending from 2.5 meters above the ground level to the top of the tower.
However, the head diameter shall be 35mm as indicated in the enclosed
drawing. The step bolt shall be fixed on two diagonally opposite legs up to top
of the towers for single, double and multi circuit towers. Each step bolt shall be
provided with two nuts on one end to fasten the bolt securely to the tower and
button head at the other end to prevent the feet from slipping away. The step
bolts shall be capable of withstanding a vertical load not less than 1.5 KN. For
special river crossing towers, ladders alongwith protection rings as per the
Employer approved design shall be provided in continuation of the step bolts
on one face of the tower from 30 meters above ground level to the top of the
special structure. From 2.5m to 30m height of super structure step bolts shall
be fixed on two diagonally opposite legs. Suitable platform using 6mm thick
perforated chequered plates alongwith suitable railing for access from step
bolts to the ladder and from the ladder to each cross-arm tip and the ground
wire support shall also to be provided. The platform shall be fixed on tower by
using counter-sunk bolts.
1.3.2 Insulator Strings and Earth wire Clamps Attachments
a) For the attachment of suspension Insulator string, if required a suitable
dimensioned swinging hanger on the tower shall be provided so as to
obtain specified clearances under respective swinging condition of the
strings. The hanger, extensions links, D-shackles etc. as required shall be of
same rating/strength as that of corresponding rating/ Ultimate tensile
Strength of Insulator string. The design and supply of hanger, D-shackles,
strain plate, extension link etc. are also in the scope of Contractor.
b) At tension towers, strain plates of suitable dimensions under each cross-
arm tip, shall be provided for taking the hooks or D-shackles of the tension
insulator strings. Full details of the attachments shall be provided to the
contractor. To achieve requisite clearances, if the design calls for providing
extra D-shackles, link plate etc. before connecting the insulator string the
Page 5 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 same shall be supplied by the Contractor. These item shall be same
rating/strength as that of as that of corresponding rating/ Ultimate tensile
Strength of Insulator string.
c) D shackles, if required for attachment of Insulator strings, shall be supplied
by the contractor from the identified and approved sub-vendor / supplier of
Hardware fittings.
1.3.3 Earth wire Clamps Attachments
For Suspension and tension clamp for attachment of earthwire Wherever
required, the Contractor shall supply U – bolts, D – Shackles etc. for attachment
of clamp to the tower. Full details of the attachments shall be provided to the
contractor. These items shall be same rating/strength as that of corresponding
rating/ Ultimate tensile Strength of earthwire suspension/tension clamp.
1.3.4 Anti climbing Device
Barbed wire type anti climbing device, as per enclosed drawing shall be
provided and installed by the Contractor for all towers . The barbed wire shall
conform to IS-278 (size designation A1). The barbed wires shall be given
chromating dip as per procedure laid down in IS:1340
1.3.5 Danger, Number, Circuit and Phase plate
Danger Plates, Circuit plates, Phase Plates and Number plates shall be provided
and installed by the Contractor. These Danger/Number/Phase/ Circuit Plate
shall be as per the drawings enclosed in the section of drawing. The contractor
shall submit distribution copies of the same endorsing the package details (i.e.
line name, LOA No. etc) and installed by the Contractor.
a) Each tower shall be fitted with a danger plate, number plate, circuit plate
and a set of phase plates for single circuit tower and two sets of phase
plates for double circuit tower. The transposition towers should have
provision of fixing phase plates on both the transverse faces.
b) The letters, figures and the conventional skull and bones of danger plates
shall conform to IS-2551 and shall be in a signal red on the front of the
plate.
c) The corners of the danger, number and circuit plates shall be rounded off
to remove sharp edges.
d) The letters of number and circuit plates shall be red enameled with white
enameled background.
1.3.5.1 Bird Guard
To prevent birds perching immediately above the suspension insulator strings (
I type / V type) and fouling the same with dropping, suitable bird guards shall
Page 6 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 be provided on all suspension towers. In case of I string Bird Guard as per IS
5613 shall be provided at cross arm tips. In case of V string, saw type Bird
Guard shall be provided on all the members/redundant members provided on
Top and Bottom plan of cross arm/Girder/BOOM/Beam of Suspension. The
typical drawing of Bird guard is attached at the drawing section of this
specification. Suitable provision of cleat / plate to be provided on all
Suspension towers facilitating installation of bird guard after stringing.
1.3.6 Aviation Requirements
1.3.6.1 Aviation requirements viz Span marker, night marker (obstruction light) and
painting of towers conforming to IS: 5613 shall be in the scope of Contractor,
wherever indicated in BPS.

1.3.6.2 Night Markers (Obstruction lights)

1.3.6.2.1 The scope of night markers covers the design, manufacture, testing at
manufacturers works, if any, supply, delivery, erection, testing and
commissioning of medium intensity, low intensity, lights along with storage
battery & solar panel, control panel, cables, clamps other accessories etc. as
per the provision of IS-5613 (Part-II/ section-I), 1989, amendment no. 1, July’94
regarding night & day visual aids for denoting transmission line structures as
per the requirement of directorate of flight safety.
1.3.6.2.2 The detail of each component of medium intensity, low intensity lights &
associated accessories to be provided on the towers shall be as per the
technical specifications given in the preceding clauses and IS/ICAO,
International Standards recommended practices.
1.3.6.2.3 One set of Aviation Lights shall consist of one medium intensity light & two/four
(as applicable) low intensity lights along with all accessories such as solar
panel, control panel, batteries, cables etc.
1.3.6.2.4 Medium Intensity Light
Medium Intensity light shall be provided on the top of each tower. The medium
light should have night time intensity as per ICAO requirements in international
Standards Recommended Practices. The light on top of the structure should
flash at the rate of 20 sequences per minute. The effective intensity during
night time for the medium flashing light shall be 1600 CD. The light shall
conform to ICAO requirements/BS 3224a and shall have weather protection
conforming to IP-55.
The above lights conforming to ICAO specifications flashing red lights shall be
DC operated through a suitably sized battery bank at the operating voltage
12V/24V DC. The burning life of the lamps shall be maximum possible in view
of the maintenance hazard of H.T. live but in no case it should be less than
15,000 burning hours. In case of failure of the lamp before 15,000 burning

Page 7 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 hours, the same shall have to be replaced by the Contractor free of cost even if
the pendency of contract expires. The light shall be equipped with radio
suppression facility conforming to BS800 in order to avoid any interference
with signals of PLCC etc.
1.3.6.2.5 Low Intensity Lights
Two/four (as applicable) nos. of low intensity lights are required to be put on
each of the towers. Placement drawing for the same shall be submitted by the
bidder Contractor.
The light shall be stationary lamp with minimum effective intensity of 10 CD. of
red light. The lamps shall conform to the ICAO requirement/relevant BS and
shall have weather protection of minimum IP-55 class.
Two/four nos. of L.I. lamp required for each tower shall be operated through a
suitable size common battery bank solar panel as per the requirement of
operating voltage and load current of the type of lamps being offered.
The burning life of the lamps shall be maximum possible in view of the
maintenance hazard of H.T live line, but in no case it should be less than 15,000
burning hours. In case of failure of the lamp before 15,000 hrs, the same shall
have to be replaced by the Contractor free of cost even if the pendency of
contract expires. Performance certificate of the lamps to be offered shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
The low intensity lamp shall not generate any R.F. which can interfere with the
PLCC signals.
1.3.6.2.6 Storage Battery
Storage Battery required for the above purpose shall be sealed maintenance
free, valve regulate lead acid and suitable for mounting on the top of the
transmission line towers. Contractors shall offer the most optimum capacity of
the Battery Bank at 120 hour discharge rate (considering 80 % percentage
usage) matching with the load requirement of the type of lamps being offered
including any power loss in the associated cables. The battery sizing shall
conform to JISC 8707/relevant Indian Standard or any other internationally
recognized standard. The battery shall be hermetically sealed explosion proof
and self-resealing type and free from orientation constraints. The working
temperature ranges shall be minimum 0 degree centigrade and maximum 50
degree centigrade. Performance certificate of the offered batteries shall be
submitted by the Contractor.
1.3.6.2.7 Battery Box
The battery box suitable for mounting on 400kV power transmission tower
shall be robust construction suitable to accommodate desired number of
SOLAR BATTERIES WITH proper clearance between the batteries. The sides and
Page 8 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 the top of the battery box shall be made from MS sheets not less than 14 SWG
thickness duly mounted on MS angle frame. The bottom of the battery box
shall have suitably designed MS structure to freely hold the total weight of the
batteries. The batteries should be placed on insulated base with proper
drainage holes. Lifting lugs shall be provided. Dust and vermin proof lockable
doors shall be provided for safety and easy access to the batteries for the
maintenance. The battery box should incorporate the design for proper
ventilation system in order to prevent a gas concentration inside the box. The
ventilation opening shall be protected against rain/splash water and dust. The
inside of the battery box shall be lined with insulating polyurethane plating and
the exterior painted with weather proof polyurethane paint. The cable entry
into the battery box shall be through suitable cable glands.
1.3.6.2.8 Solar Modules
Solar module required for the system shall be suitable for mounting on the
transmission line towers and shall be designed for high performance,
maximum reliability and minimum maintenance and shall be installed below
bottom cross arms levels. The solar modules shall be IP 55 grade protection
class. These should be highly resistant to water, abrasion, nail, impact and
other environmental factors.
These should be placed on the tower at a most optimum angle so as to harness
the maximum solar energy and facilitate self cleaning and shall conform to
relevant Indian/International Standards.
Module mounting frames shall be weather proof suitable for mounting on tall
towers. Details of mounting frames shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Junction box shall be provided with weather proof hinged lid with provision for
cable glands entry and protections grade of class IP-55.
The Contractor shall submit the basis of selecting the numbers of solar
modules.
The provision for design, supply & erection of mounting arrangements for
photovoltaic modules on the transmission towers in a suitable manner to
harness maximum solar energy shall be in the scope of the Contractor.
Provision for design, supply & erection of resting platform for the erection of
battery bank in a closed enclosure with safety arrangement on the
transmission towers shall also be in the scope of the Contractor the design and
load consideration for safety of towers due to additional plate form shall be
kept in view while designing, selecting the above.
1.3.6.2.9 Control Panels
Control panels shall consist of solar charge controller, flasher unit, sensor,
isolator, MCB, Voltmeter, Ammeter and other control gears. Panel enclosure
Page 9 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 shall be fabricated out of 14 SWG CRCA sheet and thoroughly treated and
painted. Suitable neoprene rubber gasket and pad locking device shall be
provided and the protection class shall be of IP-55 class.
The Solar charge controller shall be most efficient and preferably fully solid
state. It shall be provided with protection to load against increase in
temperature, Surge, automatic low voltage and automatic disconnection and
reconnection during high inrush current and normalcy respectively.
The flash regulator shall be provided for regulating light flashing. The same
shall be completely solid state and provided with flash rate set points. The
protection against overload current shall also be provided.
Necessary sensor/timer shall be provided in the system to “switch on” the light
automatically in the evening and poor visibility period and switch off the same
during day time and normal visibility period.
1.3.6.2.10 Cables, Cable Glands, Conduits and Accessories
The cable to be supplied and erected shall be of multi strands copper
conductor, weather proof, PVC insulated PVC sheathed, armoured 1.1 KV
grade. The same shall conform to IS:1554.
All the cable accessories such as thimble, glands etc. shall be in the scope of
supply and erection of the Contractor.
Supply and erection of all the PVC conduits and accessories shall be in the
scope of the contract. All the conduit and accessories shall be as per the
relevant ISS or ISI brand.
The inter-connection cable/conduit will be clamped in a secured manner with
the tower members and any interconnection should be made only inside the
environmentally protected junction box.
1.3.6.2.11 Earthing
All the installations on the tower shall be securely and properly earthed with
the tower body by using flexible copper braided wire. Cost of earthing material
shall deemed to be included in the total cost.
1.4 Tower Fabrication
The fabrication of towers shall be in conformity with the following:
1.4.1 Except where hereinafter modified, details of fabrication shall conform to
IS:802 (Part-II) or the relevant international standards.
1.4.2 The tower structures shall be accurately fabricated to connect together easily
at site without any undue strain on the bolts.

Page 10 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
1.4.3 No angle member shall have the two leg flanges brought together by closing
the angle.
1.4.4 The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the diameter of bolt plus 1.5mm.
1.4.5 The structure shall be such that all parts are accessible for inspection and
cleaning. Drain holes shall be provided at all points where pockets of
depression are likely to hold water.
1.4.6 All steel sections before any work is done on them, shall be carefully leveled,
straightened and made true to detailed drawings by methods which will not
injure the materials so that when assembled, the adjacent matching surfaces
are in close contact throughout. No rough edges shall be permitted in the
entire structure.
1.4.7 Drilling and Punching
1.4.7.1 Before any cutting work is started, all steel sections shall be carefully
straightened and trued by pressure and not by hammering. They shall again be
trued after being punched and drilled.
1.4.7.2 Holes for bolts shall be drilled or punched with a jig but drilled holes shall be
preferred. The punching may be adopted for thickness up to 12 mm.
Tolerances regarding punch holes are as follows:-
a) Holes must be perfectly circular and no tolerances in this respect are
permissible.
b) The maximum allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two
sides of plates or angle is 0.8mm. i.e. the allowable taper in a punched
holes should not exceed 0.8mm on diameter.
c) Holes must be square with the plates or angles and have their walls
parallel.
1.4.7.3 All burns left by drills or punch shall be removed completely. When the tower
members are in position the holes shall be truly concentric/matching to each
other. Drilling or reaming to enlarge holes shall not be permitted.
1.4.8 Erection mark
1.4.8.1 Each individual member shall have erection mark conforming to the
component number given to it in the fabrication drawings. The mark numbers
shall be marked with marking dies of 16mm size before galvanising and shall be
legible after galvanising,
1.4.8.2 Erection Mark shall be A-BB-CC-DDD
A = Employer’s code assigned to the Contractors- Alphabet
BB = Contractor’s Mark-Numerical
Page 11 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 CC = Tower Type Alphabet.
DDD = Number mark to be assigned by Contractor - Numerical.
Erection mark for high tensile steel members shall be prefixed by the letter “H”

1.5 Quantities and weights

1.5.1 The quantities of the following items have been envisaged in Metric Tonne
(MT) in the relevant price Schedules for various types of towers:-
i) Basic Body.
ii) Body Extensions.
iii) Leg Extension.
iv) Stubs & Cleats
v) Bolts & Nuts including spring washers and step bolts etc.
During detailed engineering, proto corrected shop drawings shall be released
by POWERGRID for fabrication and manufacturing as per the Technical
Specification to the Contractor. The contractor shall carry out proto-assembly
after fabrication from the Employer’s shop drawing for his verification /
satisfaction prior to mass production of the tower.
The manufacturing of the above items shall be taken up in such a manner that
the Equipment/Material offered for inspection to POWERGRID are on
completed tower basis for each type of tower, completed Stubs & Cleats set
basis so as to facilitate availability of erectable tower of each type and
erectable stubs & cleats set for casting of foundation. After inspection of the
offered Equipment/Material by POWERGRID representative(s), CIP shall be
issued by POWERGRID for the material meeting the Technical Specification.
However, MICC shall be issued only on Completed Tower Basis for each type of
tower (comprising the required Basic Body, body extensions wherever
required, four (4) equal or defined unequal Leg Extension, Bolts & Nuts along
with D-shackles,Hangers, Packing and Spring Washers) and on completed Stubs
& Cleats set basis for each type of tower foundations (comprising a set of stubs
& Cleats, required Bolts and Nuts along with Spring Washers).

Towers to be supplied by the contractors/Tower Manufacturers shall be

dispatched Panel wise as per mutually agreed procedure with Employer Quality
Assurance & Inspection Department.
Accordingly, the payment shall be released on completed Tower Basis for each
type of tower (comprising the Basic Body, body extensions, wherever
applicable, bolts & nuts along with spring washer and step bolts, unequal leg
Page 12 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 extensions wherever applicable for a completed tower) and on completed
Stubs and Cleats set basis for each type of foundation (comprising a set of stubs
& cleats, required Bolts and nuts along with Spring Washers) based on the
weight of the tower parts as calculated as per Clause 1.5.3 and fasteners based
on the unit rates incorporated in the contract.
1.5.2 The provisional quantities required (including provisional spare tower quantity)
are mentioned in the respective Schedules of BPS. Final quantities shall be
determined after completion and approval of the detailed route survey. The
final quantities of tower including spare towers shall be confirmed by the
Employer/Site in charge based on the requirement of quantities of various
towers furnished by the Contractor after completion of detailed survey. Hence
it will be responsibility of the Contractor to intimate the exact requirement of
all towers and various line materials required for line immediately after the
survey.
The Employer reserves the right to order the final quantities including required
quantities of spares for which the rates quoted in the Bid shall be valid.
Regarding quantity variation the provisions of relevant clauses of SCC shall
apply.
1.5.3 The estimated total weight of tower/tower parts as well as bolts & nuts along
with spring washers and step bolts to be supplied by the Contractor under
various packages have been envisaged in the relevant Price Schedule. Though
fully galvanised tower parts are to be supplied, the weight of tower shall mean
the weight of tower calculated by using the black sectional (i.e. ungalvanised)
weight of steel members of the size indicated in the approved fabrication
drawings and bill of materials, without taking into consideration the reduction
in weights due to holes, notches and bevel cuts etc. but taking into
consideration the weight of the D shackles, hangers, strain plates, pack plates,
gusset plates, extension link/plates and pack washers etc. The weight of stub
and cleats also shall be calculated in similar manner. The weight of strain
plates, pack plates, extension link and gusset plates shall mean the weight of
its circumscribing rectangle, without taking into considerations the reductions
in weight due to holes, notches etc. The weight of D-shackles, hangers and
pack washers shall be net actual weight taking into consideration reduction
due to holes. For bolts and nuts along with spring washers and step bolts, the
weight per tower shall be calculated from the bolt schedule applicable to each
type of towers and body extensions as approved by the Employer. The rate
quoted by the bidder for tower/tower parts supply, is deemed to be inclusive
of galvanising charges including the cost of zinc.
1.5.4 The contractor is permitted to get inspected and supply upto 2.5% extra
fasteners to take care of losses during erection. No payment shall be admissible
for these extra supplies.

Page 13 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
1.6 Galvanising
1.6.1 Fabricated Tower Parts & Stubs

The tower parts, stubs and pack washers shall be hot dip galvanized .The
galvanization shall be done as per requirements of IS 4759 after all fabrication
work is completed. The contractor shall also take guidelines from the
recommended practices for hot dip galvanizing laid down in IS 2629 while
deciding and implementing galvanizing procedure. The mandatory
requirements however, are specified herein.

The fabricated tower parts and stubs shall have a minimum overall Zinc coating
of 610 gms per sq. m of surface area except for plates & sections below 5mm
which shall have Zinc coating of 460 gms per sq. m of surface area. The average
zinc coating for all sections and plates 5mm & above shall be maintained as 87
microns and that for plates & sections below 5mm shall be maintained as 65
microns.

However, under marine environment, as specifically mentioned in BPS the

fabricated tower parts and stubs shall have a minimum overall zinc coating of
900 gms / sq m of surface area except for plates and sections below 5mm
which shall have a minimum overall zinc coating of 610gms/ sqm of surface
area. The average zinc coating for all sections and plates 5mm and above shall
be maintained as 127 microns and that for plates and sections below 5mm
shall be maintained as 87 microns.
The zinc coating shall be adherent, reasonably uniform, smooth, continuous
and free from imperfections such as black/ bare spots, ash rust strains, bulky
white deposits / wet storage strains and blisters.

The surface preparation for fabricated tower parts and stubs for hot dip
galvanizing shall be carried out as indicated herein below:

(i) Degreasing & Cleaning of Surface: Degreasing and cleaning of surface,

wherever required, shall be carried out in accordance with clause 4.1 of
IS 2629-1985.After degreasing the article shall be thoroughly rinsed.
However, if acidic degreasers are used rinsing is not required.

(ii) Pickling: Pickling shall be done using either hydrochloric or sulphuric acid
as recommended at clause 4.3 of IS 2629 -1985. The actual
concentration of the acids and the time duration of immersion shall be
determined by the Contractor depending on the nature of material to be
pickled. Suitable inhibitors also shall be used with the acids to avoid over
pickling. The acid concentration, inhibitors used, and maximum
allowable iron content shall form part of plant standard to be

Page 14 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 formulated and submitted to employer along with Quality Assurance
Program.

(iii) Rinsing: After pickling, the material shall be rinsed, preferably in running
water to remove acid traces, iron particles or any other impurities from
the surface. Two rinse tanks are preferable, with water cascading from
the second tank to the first to ensure thorough cleaning. Wherever
single tank is employed, the water shall be periodically changed to avoid
acid contamination, and removal of other residue from the tank.

(iv) Fluxing: The rinsed article shall be dipped in a solution of Zinc

ammonium chloride. The concentration and temperature of the flux
solution shall be standardized by the contractor depending on the article
to be galvanized and individual circumstances. These shall form part of
plant standard to be formulated and submitted to employer along with
Quality Assurance Program. The specific gravity of the flux solution shall
be periodically monitored and controlled by adding required quantity of
flux crystals to compensate for drag-out losses. Free acid content of the
flux solution also shall be periodically checked and when it is more than
two (2) grams of free acid per litre of the solution, it shall be neutralized.
Alternatively, Ph value should be monitored periodically and maintained
between 5.0 to 5.5.

(v) Drying: When dry galvanizing is adopted the article shall be thoroughly
dried after fluxing. For the purpose of drying, the contractor may use hot
plate, air oven or any other proven method ensuring complete drying of
the article after fluxing and prior to dipping in the molten zinc bath. The
drying process shall be such that the article shall not attain a
temperature at which the flux shall get decomposed. The article thus
dried shall be galvanized before the flux coating picks up moisture from
the atmosphere or the flux layer gets damaged or removed from the
surface. The drying procedure, time duration, temperature limits, time
lag between fluxing, drying, galvanizing etc shall form part of plant
standard to be formulated and submitted to employer along with
Quality Assurance Program.

(vi) Quality of Zinc: Any one or combination of the grades of zinc specified in
IS 209 or IS 13229:1991 (reaffirmed in 2014)/Prime Western (PW grade)
(Zn 98.65%) or other comparable international standard shall be used
for galvanizing. The contractor shall declare the grade(s) of zinc
proposed to be used by them for galvanizing. The molten metal in the
zinc bath shall contain minimum 98.5 % zinc by mass. It shall be
periodically measured and recorded. Zinc aluminum alloy shall be added
as per IS 2629.

Page 15 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 (vii) Dipping Process: The temperature of the galvanizing bath shall be
continuously monitored and controlled. The working temperature of the
galvanizing bath shall be maintained at 450+/ - 10 degree C .The article
should be immersed in the bath as rapidly as possible without
compromising on safety aspects. The galvanizing bath temperature,
immersion angle & time, time duration of immersion, rate of
withdrawal etc shall be monitored and controlled depending upon the
size , shape, thickness and chemical composition of the article such that
the mass of zinc coating and its uniformity meets the specified
requirements and the galvanized surface is free from imperfections and
galvanizing defects.

(viii) Post Treatment: The article shall be quenched in water. The quench
water is to be changed / drained periodically to prevent corrosive salts
from accumulating in it. If water quenching is not done then necessary
cooling arrangements should be made. The galvanized articles shall be
dipped in chromating solution containing sodium dichromate and
sulphuric acid or chromic acid base additive at a predetermined
concentration and kept at room temperature to retard white rust attack.
The temperature of the chromate solution shall not exceed 65 degree C.
The articles shall not be stacked immediately after quenching and
dichromating. It shall be ensured that the articles are dry before any
further handling operation.

(ix) Storing, Packing and Handling: In order to prevent white rust formation
sufficient care should be exercised while storing handling and
transporting galvanized products. The articles shall be stored in an
adequately ventilated area. The articles shall be stored with spacers in
between them and kept at an inclination to facilitate easy drainage of
any water collected on the articles. Similar care is to be taken while
transporting and storing the articles at site.

The Contractor shall prepare a detailed galvanizing procedure including Flow

Chart with control parameters and all plant standards as required above and
submit to POWERGRID for approval as part of Quality Assurance Plan.

1.6.2 Fasteners.

For fasteners, the galvanizing shall conform to IS-1367(Part-13). The galvanizing

shall be done with centrifuging arrangement after all mechanical operations
are completed. The nuts, may however be tapped (threaded) or rerun after
galvanizing and the threads oiled .The threads of bolts & nuts shall have a neat
fit and shall be such that they can be turned with finger throughout the length
of the threads of bolts and they shall be capable of developing full strength of
bolts. Spring washers shall be electro galvanized as per Grade-IV of IS-1573.
Page 16 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
1.7 Earthing
Each tower shall be earthed. The tower footing resistance shall not exceed 10
ohms. The Contractor shall measure the tower footing resistance (TFR) of each
tower during dry weather after it has been erected and before the stringing of
the earth wire. Pipe type earthing and counter poise type earthing shall be
done as required in accordance with the following standards:
IS: 3043 Code of practice for Earthing.
IS:5613 Code of practice for Design, Installation and maintenance
(Part-II/Section-2) of overhead power lines.
1.7.1 The drawings for pipe & counterpoise type earthing are enclosed with these
specifications.
1.7.2 For pipe type earthing, length of flat indicated in the drawing in Section-VII is
indicative only and actual length shall vary depending on site requirement (to
avoid fouling of pipe type earthing with foundation base slab). The payment for
the pipe type earthing shall be as per the unit rates in the BPS irrespective of
the length of flat
1.7.3 For counterpoise type earthing, the earthing will vary depending on soil
resistivity. For soil resistivity less than 1500 ohms-meter, earthing shall be
established by providing 4 lengths of 30m counterpoise wire. Otherwise, for
soil resistivity greater than 1500 ohms meter earthing shall be established by
providing 4 length of 70m counterpoise wire. The contractor shall also measure
tower footing impedance using high frequency Tower footing impedance
measurement kit, in addition to Tower footing resistance (TFR). The value of
Tower footing resistance as well as tower footing impedance shall not exceed
10 Ohms.
1.7.4 The provisional quantities for pipe type earthings and counterpoise earthing
are indicated in the BPS. The bidders are required to quote unit rates for the
same in appropriate schedule of BPS. The quoted price shall include
fabrication, supply and installation of earthing material including supply of
coke, salt etc. In case of counterpoise type earthing, the unit rates shall
correspond to 120/280 meters of counterpoise wire per tower.

1.7.5 Chemical pipe/counter poise type earthing shall be provided in some locations
as decided by Site In charge, where due to high resistivity tower footing
resistance/impedance below 10 ohms is not achieved with normal
pipe/counter poise type earthing. The provisional quantities for chemical pipe
type earthing and counterpoise earthing are indicated in the BPS. For chemical
pipe/counter poise type earthing, ground enhancement material /back fill
/grounding compound shall be used. The material should generally conform to
Page 17 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 IEC 62561 Part-7. The material should be permanent and maintenance free. It
should not dissolve or decompose or otherwise pollute the soil or local water
table & environment and should not depend on the continuous presence of
water or moisture in the surrounding to maintain its conductivity. The material
of the earthing enhancing compound in its set form should have a resistivity of
less than 0.12 ohm-m (as per IEEE 80-2000 Cl. No. 14.5(d)). It should have
hygroscopic properties and should not cause burns, irritation to eyes, skin etc.
Test report for the following test on earthing enhancement compound
(conducted at accredited laboratory as per IEC 62561 Part-7) shall be
submitted by the contractor to the site in charge.
 Resistivity test using soil box
 Leaching test
 Sulfur determination
 Corrosion test
1.7.6 Earthing for River Crossing Towers /Pile foundation
Galvanised earthing strip of flat 50 x 6 mm is to be provided in two legs of
tower for each location with proper arrangement of connecting these strips by
16mm bolts shall be provided in the stubs. The Earthing strip from the tower
leg may be connected to the MS liner through the pile cap (an indicative
drawing is enclosed at drawing section ). In case the length of the liner
embedded in the ground/river bed is less than 3m or pile without liner the
earthing strip shall be extended along the pile & embedded in the soil upto
min. 3m depth from the present minimum RL. After execution of the earthing
tower footing resistance/impedance is to be measured and should be
maintained below 10 Ohms by suitable measures. In case due to specific soil
conditions required tower footing resistance/impedance below 10 Ohms is not
achieved, then additional separate earthing (pipe/counterpoise type) may be
provided. Only bolted connections are allowed for connecting this strip to
achieve desired length. Contractor shall submit the detailed drawing for
approval of Owner before installations.
Note: During O&M stage, in case it is observed that MS liner/strip embedded in
the ground/ river bed is exposed due to scouring etc. and length of embedment
of liner/strip is less than 3m. Earthing strip may be extended in the
ground/river bed upto 3m from the other end of the liner/strip by
POWERGRID.

1.7.7 In case of location where foundation is classified as hard rock and laying of
counter poise earthing at required depth of 1 m below the ground level is not
feasible, the earthing shall be provided at reduced depth as per enclosed
drawing of “counter poise earthing in hard rock strata. For the payment of
hard rock earthing, the unit rate under the contract for chemical counter poise
earthing shall be applicable.
Page 18 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
1.7.8 Additional earthing shall be provided on every 7 to 8 kms distance at tension
tower (exact quantity & location to be decided by Site In-charge) for direct
earthing of both shield wires (earhwire/OPGW). Indicative drawing of shield
wire earthing arrangement is enclosed at relevant section (Drawing) of
technical specification. The scope of work shall inter-alia include supply &
installation of PG clamp & down lead clamps and supply & installation of
additional earthing (pipe type or counter poise type) depending upon soil
resistivity. Additional earthwire bits required for down leads connecting shield
wires with the earthing shall be either supplied by Owner separetly (as Owner
supplied material) or shall be supplied by contractor (payable as per unit rate of
GS Earthwire under the contract),as may be decided by Site In charge.

1.7.9 Additional Rod type earthing shall be provided in one of the foundation pit
(diagonally opposite to pipe type earthing) of all the transmission line towers in
normal soil (i.e Dry, Wet cultivated, Wet, PS, FS & Black Cotton soil) in addition
to pipe type earthing. This additional earthing MS Rod of 40 mm dia & 3.0 M
length shall be driven after excavation of foundation pit and connected to stub
cleat. The indicative drawing of Rod type earthing is enclosed in the section of
drawing.

1.8 Standards
1.8.1 The design, manufacturing, fabrication, galvanising, testing, erection procedure
and materials used for manufacture and erection of towers, design and
construction of foundations shall conform to the following Indian Standards
(IS)/International Standards which shall mean latest revisions, with
amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specifically stated
otherwise in the Specification. In the event of supply of material conforming to
Standards other than specified, the Bidder shall confirm in his bid that these
Standards are equivalent to those specified. In case of award, salient features
of comparison between the Standards proposed by the Bidder and those
specified in this document will be provided by the Contractor to establish their
equivalence.
1.8.2 The material and services covered under these specifications shall be
performed as per requirements of the relevant standard code referred
hereinafter against each set of equipment and services. Other internationally
acceptable standards which ensure equal or higher performance than those
specified shall also be accepted.

Sl. Indian Standard Title International

No. Standard
Page 19 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Sl. Indian Standard Title International
No. Standard
1. IS:209-1992 Zinc INGOT - Specification ISO/R/752
(Reaffirmed in 2012) ASTM B6
2. IS:278-2009 Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing- ASTM A131
(Reaffirmed in 2015) Specification
3. IS:800-2007 General construction in steel - Code of CSA 6.1.94
(Reaffirmed in 2012) practice BS5950/2000
4(a). IS:802(Part 1) Use of structural steel in overhead ASCE 52
Sec 1-2015 transmission line towers - code of practice ASCE 10-97
Sec 2-2016 part 1 materials, loads and design strengths IEC 826
Section- 1: Materials and loads BS 8100
Section-2 : Design Strengths.
4(b). IS:802(Part 2)-1978 Code of Practice for use of structural steel ASCE 52
(Reaffirmed in 2013) in Overhead Transmission Line Towers:
Part-2
Fabrication, Galvanising, inspection &
Packing
4(c). IS:802(Part 3)- 1978 Code of Practice for use of structural steel ASCE 52
(Reaffirmed in 2013) in Overload Transmission Line: Part-3 ASCE10
IEC 652
Tower testing
5. IS:808-1989 Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beam,
(Reaffirmed in 2014) Column, Channel and Angle Sections.
6(a). IS:875- Part-1, 2, 4, Code of Practice for Design Loads (other
5: 1987 (Reaffirmed than Earthquakes) for Buildings and
in 2013) Structures.
6(b). IS:875-Part-3: 2015 Design Loads (other than Earthquakes) for
Buildings and Structures- Code of Practice
7. IS:1363- Part-1, 2, 3: Hexagon head bolts, Screws and Nuts of
2002 (Reaffirmed in product Grade `C’
2013)
8. IS:1367-Part 1 to 20 Technical Supply Conditions for Threaded
Steel Fasteners
9. IS:1477-1971 Code of practice for Painting of Ferrous
(Reaffirmed in 2015) Metals in Buildings:
Part-I: Pre-treatment
Part-II: Painting.
10. IS:1573-1986 Electro-Plated Coatings of zinc on iron and
(Reaffirmed in 2016) Steel

Page 20 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Sl. Indian Standard Title International
No. Standard
11. IS:1852-1985 10. Rolling and Cutting Tolerances of Hot
(Reaffirmed in 2013) Rolled Steel Products
12. IS-1893- 11. Criteria
10. for Earthquake Resistant Design of IEEE 693-2005
Part 1: 2016 Structures
Part 2: 2014
Part 3: 2014
Part 4: 2015
13. IS:2016-1967 12. Specification
11. for Plain10.
Washers ISO667-2000
(Reaffirmed in 2011) ANSI-B-18.2
14. IS:2062-2011
13. 12.
Hot Rolled
11. medium and
10.High tensile
(Reaffirmed in 2016) Structural steel
15 IS:2074-1992
13. 12.
Ready 11.
Mixed Paint. Air
10.Drying, Red Oxide
(Reaffirmed in 2014) Zinc Chrome, Priming Specification.
& IS:2074-Part-1 :
2015
16. IS:2551-1982
13. Danger11.
12. Notice Plates 10.
(Reaffirmed in 2015)
17. IS:2629-1985 16. 13.
Recommended
12. Practice
11.for Hot Dip 10.
(Reaffirmed in 2016) Galvanizing of iron and steel.
18. IS:2633-1986 17. Method
16. of Testing
13. Uniformity12. of Coating of 11. ASTM A123/10.
(Reaffirmed in 2016) Zinc Coated Articles ASTM123M
19. IS:3043-1987 18. Code17.
of Practice for Earthing
16. 13. 12. 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2016)
20. IS:3063-1994 18. Fastners-Single
17. coil Rectangular
16. 13. section 12. DIN-127A 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2015) Spring Lock Washers (positive
pattern)
21. IS:3757-1985 18. Specification
17. for High16.
Strength
13.Structural 12. 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2014) Bolts
22. IS:4759-1996 18. Specification
17. for Hot-dip
16. zinc13.
coatings on 12. 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2016) structural steel and other Allied products
23. IS:5369-1975 18. General
17. Requirements
16.
for Plain
13. Washers 12. 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2011) and Lock Washers
24 IS:5613-Part 1 : 1985 Code of Practice for Design installation and
a). (Reaffirmed
23. in 2012) 18.
Maintenance
17. of Overhead
16. Power
13. Lines: 12. 11. 1
Lines up to and including 11 KV
Section-1: Design,
Section-2: Installation and Maintenance

Page 21 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Sl. Indian Standard Title International
No. Standard
24 IS:5613-Part 2 : 1985 Code of Practice for Design installation and
b). (Reaffirmed
23. in 2012) 18.
Maintenance
17. of Overhead
16. Power
13. Lines: 12. 11. 1
Lines above 11 KV and upto and including
220 KV
Section-1: Design,
Section-2: Installation and Maintenance
24 IS:5613-Part 2 : 1989 Code of Practice for Design installation and
c). (Reaffirmed
23. in 2014) 18.
Maintenance
17. of Overhead
16. Power
13. Lines: 12. 11. 1
400kV Lines
Section-1: Design,
Section-2: Installation and Maintenance
25. IS:6610-1972
23. 18.
Specification
17. for Heavy
16.Washers
13. for Steel 12. 11. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2011) structures
26. IS:6623-2004
25. 23. High18.
Strength Structural
17. Nuts 16. 13. 12. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2015)
27. IS:6639-1972
25. 23. Hexagon
18. Bolts for Steel
17.Structure. 16. 13.ASTM A394 12. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2015) ASTM A90/
A90M
28. IS:6745-1972
25. 23. Method
18. for Determination
17. of Mass of 16.Zinc 13.ASTM A90/ 12. 1
(Reaffirmed in 2016) coating on zinc coated iron and Steel A90M
Articles.
29. IS:10238-2001
29. Fasteners - Threaded Steel Fasteners - Step
(Reaffirmed in 2011) Bolts For Steel Structures
30. IS:12427-2001
29. Fasteners - Threaded Steel Fasteners -
(Reaffirmed in 2011) Hexagon Head Transmission Tower Bolts
31. 29. Indian Electricity Rules.
32. Publication
29. No. Regulation for Electrical Crossing of Railway
19(N)/700 Tracks

The standards mentioned above are available from

Reference Abbreviation Name and Address

Page 22 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 BIS/IS Beureau Of Indian Standards.
Manak Bhavan,
9, Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg,
New Delhi - 110001.
INDIA
ISO International Organisation for
Standardization.
ISO Central Secretariat
BIBC II
Chemin de Blandonnet 8
CP 401
1214 Vernier, Geneva
Switzerland
CSA Canadian Standard Association
178, Rexadale Boulevard,
Toronto, ON
Canada, M9W 1R3
DIN Deutsches Institute fiir Normung,
Burggrafenstrassee 6
D-10787, Berlin
GERMANY
ASTM American Society for testing and Material
100 Barr Harbor Drive
P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA
19428-2959, USA
Indian electricity Rules Kitab Mahal
Regulation for electricity crossing Baba Kharak singh Marg
of railway Tracks New Delhi-110001
INDIA
ASCE American Society of civil Engineers
1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191-4400
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers
3 Park Avenue, 17th Floor
New York, NY 10016-5997 USA
IEC International Electro technical
Commission,
IEC Central Office
3, rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131
1211 Geneva 20
Switzerland

Page 23 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
2.0 Foundations
2.1 Foundation includes supply of all labour, tools & machineries, materials such as
cement, sand, coarse aggregates and reinforcement steel and all associated
activities, such as, excavation, concreting and back filling etc.
2.2 Type of Foundations

The foundation shall generally be of open cast type. Plain Cement

Concrete/Reinforced Cement Concrete footing shall be used for all type of
normal towers. All the four footings of the tower and their extensions shall be
similar for a particular location, except where soil condition and or water table
are different at different legs. The total depth of foundation, below ground
level shall generally be 3.0 meters. For Hard Rock type and also where specific
site conditions / properties demand foundation of different depths (lower or
higher), the same shall be adopted.

Further, for multi-circuit tower foundations, the foundation depth shall be 3.5
meters and for river crossing open cast foundations, the foundation depth shall
be more than 3.5 meters.

2.3 Classifications of Foundations:

The foundation designs shall depend upon the type of soil, sub soil water level
and the presence of surface water which have been classified as follows (except
pile foundations which is described in relevant section of this specification).
2.3.1 Normal dry
To be used for locations where normal dry cohesive or non-cohesive soils are
met. Foundations in areas where surface water encountered from rain runoff
shall also be classified as normal dry.

2.3.2 Sandy Dry Soil

To be used for locations where cohesion less pure sand or sand with clay
content less than 10% met in dry condition. If the clay content is more than 10
% met in dry condition, the foundation shall be classified as Normal Dry.

2.3.3 Wet
To be used for locations where sub-soil water table is met between 1.5 meters
from ground level and the depth of foundation below the ground level.

2.3.4 Wet Cultivated

Page 24 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 To be used for locations where there is no sub-soil water within the foundation
depth but which are in surface water for long period with water penetration
not exceeding one meter below the ground level e.g paddy fields/cultivated
field. However, if water penetration due to surface water is more than one
meter below ground level, the adoption of suitable foundation shall be decided
by site In-charge in consultation with corporate engineering deptt.

2.3.5 Partially Submerged

To be used at locations where sub-soil water table is met between 0.75 meter
and 1.5metre below the ground level.

2.3.6 Fully Submerged

To be used at locations where sub-soil water table is met at less than 0.75
meter below the ground level.

2.3.7 Black Cotton Soil

To be used at locations where soil is clayey type, not necessarily black in colour,
which shrinks when dry and swells when wet, resulting in differential
movement. For designing foundations, for such locations, the soil is considered
submerged in nature.

2.3.8 Fissured - Rock

To be used at locations where decomposed or fissured rock, hard gravel,

kankar, limestone, laterite or any other soil of similar nature is met. Under cut
type foundation is to be used for fissured rock locations.

In case of fissured rock locations, where water table is met at 1.5M or more
below ground level, wet fissured rock foundations shall be adopted. Where
fissured rock is encountered with subsoil water table less than 1.5 meter below
ground level, submerged fissured rock foundations shall be adopted. In case of
dry locations dry fissured rock foundations shall be adopted.

2.3.9 Hard Rock

The locations where chiseling, drilling and blasting is required for excavation for
monolithic rock for a particular leg/tower, Hard rock type foundations are to be
used. For these locations rock anchoring is to be provided to resist uplift
forces.

2.3.10 The sub-soil water table is not constant and its level changes during different
seasons due to various factors. In case during soil investigation/trial pit or
during excavation, if wet soil / fissures rock is encountered within the
Page 25 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 foundation depth, it is to be considered that water table has been encountered
(considering that water table had reached that level sometime in past) and
accordingly type of foundation shall be classified.

2.3.11 Where soil is of composite in nature, classification of foundation shall be

according to the type of soil predominant in the foundation pit.

2.3.12 The foundation classification at any particular location shall be based on the
type of soil (clay / sandy / silt / fissured rock etc) and water table, presence of
surface water, etc. at the location. However, in case of locations which are in
vicinity of rivers, depending upon case to case, type of foundation is to be
decided considering other aspects also e.g in case RL (reduced level) of a
location in comparison to the HFL is lower and there is possibility of
submergence at the time of floods due to absence of river bunds / protection
etc., FS type foundation with suitable raised chimney is to be adopted. Further
in case there is a possibility of change in river course, considering the nature
and turbulence of probable water flow and subsequent scouring of soil, pile
type or special foundation may be considered for these locations.

2.4 Design of Foundations

2.4.1 Design of foundations as classified under Cl. 2.3 for all towers and towers with
extensions shall be developed by the Employer based on the standard soil
properties. The indicative shape of foundation is also enclosed in this
specification.

2.4.2 In case of normal foundation, minimum clearance between chimney concrete

level and ground level shall be 225 mm. Based on specific site condition to
avoid rusting of stubs, foundation with 500 mm clearance between concrete
level and ground level may be used on case to case basis as may decided by Site
In-charge.

2.4.3 Depending on the site conditions other types of foundations shall also be
designed and provided by the Employer suitable for Intermediate conditions
under the above classifications to effect more economy or to suit specific site
conditions encountered.

The proposal for these types of foundations shall be submitted by the

Contractor based on the detailed soil investigation and duly recommended by
Engineer-in-charge.

2.4.4 The construction drawings /working drawings of all type of foundations

classified as in clause 2.3 shall be provided to the contractor progressively
during execution stage. The drawings for other foundations designed for

Page 26 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 specific site conditions shall be provided based on actual site requirements
only.
2.4.5 The special foundations like pile foundations and combined raft foundation if
required shall also be designed by the Employer based on detailed soil
investigation report .The working drawing of these foundations shall be
provided by the Employer to the Contractor during execution stage based on
requirements. For detailed specification for pile foundations relevant section of
this specification shall apply.
2.4.6 The provisional quantities of excavation, concreting and reinforcement steel
required for the project are furnished in the BPS.

2.5 Soil Investigation

The Contractor may be required to undertake soil investigation as per clause 4
of Section III at some tower locations as required by the Employer. The
provisional numbers of soil testing locations are furnished in BPS. However,
contractor shall take reference to the soil investigations wherever already
carried out by the Employer.

2.6 Properties of Concrete

2.6.1 For open cast type foundation
The cement concrete used for the foundations shall generally be of grade M-20
having 1:1.5:3 nominal volumetric mix ratio with 20mm coarse aggregate
graded downward for chimney portion and pyramid or slab portion. All the
properties of concrete regarding its strength under compression, tension,
shear, punching and bending etc. as well as workmanship will conform to
IS:456.

2.6.2.1 The Quantity of minimum cement to be used per unit quantity of consumption
for different mix (nominal mix) of concrete should be as follows:

Sl.no. Description Unit Quantity of Minimum cement to

be used per Unit quantity of work
(in kgs)
1. 1:1.5:3 nominal mix concrete Cu.m. 400
2. 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete Cu.m. 320
3. 1:3:6 nominal mix concrete Cu.m. 220
4. Random Rubble Masonry with Cu.m. 83
1:6 cement mortar

In this regard utilisation record is to be maintained at site.

Page 27 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
2.6.2.2 Alternatively, Ready Mix concrete from batching plant as per IS 4925 can also
be used used with no extra payment and without any recovery. However
Cement content shall be as per IS 456. The ready mix concrete shall conform
to IS:4926. The selection and use of Materials for the ready mix concrete shall
be in accordance with IS:456. The concrete shall be of M25 grade design mix as
per IS:456. The transport of concrete and transportation time shall be as per
IS:4926.

2.6.2.3 Ready-mix concrete of M25 grade design mix as per IS:456, shall be used for
foundations of railway crossing locations.

2.6.2.4 Use of small batching machines/self-loading mixers may be allowed after

verification of cement consumption and mix by Employer site in-charge. The
equipment shall have facility of checking the proportion of ingredients of
concrete being made. The records of mix shall be maintained at site. The
calibration of equipment shall be done at regular intervals.

2.6.2.5 Ready mix concrete of M25 grade shall be designed as per IS-456. However,
minimum cement content shall not be less than 330kg/m3.

2.6.3 Cement used shall be ordinary Portland Cement, unless mentioned otherwise,
conforming to the latest Indian Standard Code IS:269 or IS:8112 or IS:12269.

Alternatively, other varieties of cement other than ordinary Portland Cement

such as Portland Pozzolana Cement conforming to IS;1489 (latest edition) or
Portland Slag Cement conforming to IS:455 (Latest edition) can also be used.
The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer’s certificate, for each
consignment of cement procured, to the Employer. However Employer
reserves the right to direct the Contractor to conduct tests for each batch/lot
of cement used by the Contractor and Contractor will conduct those tests free
of cost at the laboratory so directed by the Employer. The Contractor shall also
have no claim towards suspension of work due to time taken in conducting
tests in the laboratory. Changing of brand or type of cement within the same
structure shall not be permitted without the prior approval of the Employer.
Sulphate Resistant Cement shall be used if Sulphate content is more than the
limits specified in IS:456, as per Geotechnical investigation report.
Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) and Portland Pozzolana Cement (PPC) or
Portland Slag Cement are Technically Equivalent and there would not be any
financial implication / or recovery to be borne by Employer / Contractor.
However the minimum cement content shall be as per above table for nominal
mix concrete.
2.6.4 Coarse and fine aggregates shall confirm to IS:383:2016.

Page 28 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
2.6.5 The water used for mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from oil, acids
& alkalis, organic materials or other deleterious substances.

2.6.6 Reinforcement shall confirm to IS:1786 for high strength steel bars (Fe 500/
Fe500D). If mentioned in BPS, epoxy coated reinforcement conforming to IS
13620 shall be used. Thermo Mechanically Treated (TMT) bars (equivalent
grade) in place of cold twisted bars are also accepted. Hard drawn steel wire
shall conform to IS 432. All reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose
mill scales, dust, loose rust and coats of paint, oil or other coatings, which may
destroy or reduce bond. Contractor shall supply, fabricate and place
reinforcement to shapes and dimensions as indicated or as required to carry
out the intent of approved foundation drawings and Specifications. The
contractor may also use pre-fabricated/assembled reinforcement cage
conforming to shape, dimension, size as per approved foundation drawing.
Spacers, chairs, stays, hangers, overlaps and annealed steel wire for binding
etc. as may be necessary, should be used for proper completion of the
foundation job as per requirement. Spacers or chairs should be placed at a
maximum spacing of 1m and closer spacing shall be provided wherever
necessary.

2.6.7 Use of crushed stone in place of natural sand, in case of non-availability or

restriction by local authority, may be allowed by Employer site in-charge
subject to sieve analysis meeting acceptance criteria as per relevant IS and
complying of other requirement as per standard field quality plan.

2.6.8 For foundation in creek or aggressive soil areas, if mentioned in BPS, Concrete
of M30 Grade design Mix conforming to IS 456 and epoxy coated
reinforcement as per IS 13620 shall be used . In addition, 02 (two) coats of
bituminous painting of minimum 1.6 kg/m2 per coat shall be applied on all the
exposed faces of the foundation (i.e pedestal & base slab) . Cost of bituminous
painting shall be deemed to be included in the unit rate of M30 concrete.

2.7 Construction of Tower Foundation, Stub Setting and Earthing

2.7.1 Excavation
2.7.1.1 The excavation work for foundations shall be taken up by the contractor
progressively stretch wise / section wise after obtaining approval from
Employer for the proposed stretch wise / section wise tower schedule, profile
etc. as per detailed survey along the approved route alignment.
2.7.1.2 Except as specifically otherwise provided, all excavation for footings shall be
made to the lines and grades of the foundations. The excavation wall shall be
vertical and the pit dimensions shall be based on an assumed clearance of
150mm on all sides of the foundation pad. For footings with undercut, care
shall be taken to carry out excavation as per drawing without any side
Page 29 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 clearance. All excavation shall be protected so as to maintain a clean sub grade
and provide worker safety until the footing is placed, wherever the soil is loose
or collapsible or in case of water in excavated pit, using timbering, shoring,
shuttering, dewatering arrangements etc. as approved by the Employer/Site
Incharge. Contractor shall especially avoid disturbing the bearing surface of the
pad. Any sand, mud, silt or other undesirable materials which may accumulate
in the excavated pit or borehole shall be removed by Contractor before placing
concrete.
2.7.1.3 Keeping in view of safety aspect, in case any sloped/stepped/ramp excavation
for easy movement of man & material in excavation pit is required the same
shall be done by the contractor. Payment of excavation in such cases shall be
limited to design volume of excavation.
2.7.1.4 The soil to be excavated for tower foundations shall be classified as follows
depending upon the physical state of the soil at the time of excavation
irrespective of the type of foundation installed.
a) Dry Soil
Soil removable either manually, by means of a spade and shovel or
mechanically by poclains, excavators etc.
Excavation done in dry soil for wet, partially submerged, fully submerged and
wet black cotton type of foundations shall also be covered under this.
b) Wet Soil
During excavation, if wet soil is encountered within the foundation depth, the
type of soil shall be considered as Wet irrespective of whether pumping /
bailing out of water is required or not. The excavation done in wet soil in case
of wet, wet cultivated, partially submerged, fully submerged and wet black
cotton type of foundation shall also be covered under this.
c) Dry Fissured Rock
Limestone, laterite, hard conglomerate or other soft or fissured rock in dry
condition which can be quarried or split with crowbars, wedges, pickaxes etc.
However, if required, light blasting may be resorted to for loosening the
material but this will not in any way entitle the material to be classified as hard
rock.
d) Wet Fissured Rock
Above fissured rock, when encountered with subsoil water within the range of
foundation depth or land where pumping or bailing out of water is required,
shall be treated as wet fissured rock.
e) Hard Rock

Page 30 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Any rock excavation, other than specified under fissured rock above, for which
blasting, drilling, chiseling are required. The unit rate quoted for hard rock
excavation shall be inclusive of all costs for such drilling (including drilling
required for anchoring), chiseling and blasting, etc.
2.7.1.5 No extra payment shall be admitted for the removal of fallen earth into a pit or
borehole once excavated.
2.7.1.6 Where rock is encountered, the holes for tower footings shall preferably be
drilled. Blasting where resorted to as an economy measure, shall be done with
utmost care to minimise fracturing rock and using extra concrete for filling the
blasted area. All necessary precautions for handling and use of blasting
materials shall be taken. In case where drilling is done, the stubs may be
shortened suitably with the approval of the Employer.
In cases where unnecessarily large quantities are excavated/blasted for fissured
rock/hard rock, resulting in placement of large volumes of concrete, payment
of concrete shall be limited to design volumes of excavation, concreting,
reinforcement etc.
2.7.1.7 The Contractor shall arrange & supply requisite blasting material, and be
responsible for its storage and use, without any extra cost to the Employer.
2.7.1.8 Indian Standard IS:3764 shall be followed regarding safety of excavation work.
2.8 Unit Rates and Measurement for Foundation

2.8.1 The indicative shape of foundations are enclosed in this Specification. The
bidder is required to quote the unit rates for different foundation activity
namely, excavation for different types of soils, concreting, supply and
placement of reinforcement steel and stub setting in the BPS.

2.8.2 The unit rates of excavation for each type of soil shall include excavation along
with all associated activities like shoring, shuttering, dewatering till completion
of foundation work stock piling, dressing, back filling of foundations after
concreting with excavated/borrowed earth (irrespective of lead) and
consolidation of earth, carriage of surplus earth to the suitable point of disposal
as required by the Employer or any other activity required for to completion of
foundation work in all respect.

The measurement for excavation shall be made on the basis of design

excavation volume arrived at considering dimension of pit leaving 150mm gap
around (except for under cut foundations) the base pad or actually excavated
whichever is less and the unit rate of this item as indicated in Letter of Award.
The payment for excavation shall be made as per actual type of soil
encountered at the time of excavation, but the total payment for excavation
portion shall not exceed the amount as payable for excavation considering the
Page 31 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 soil type same as that of foundation classification. The decision of the Employer
shall be final and binding with respect to classification of soil and foundations.

2.8.3 Form boxes shall be used for casting of foundations (except under cut portion
of foundation). The unit rate of concreting shall include the cost of supply,
fabrication and placement of form boxes, cement, water, coarse and fine
aggregates mixing and placing of concrete, curing of concrete and any other
activities related / required for completion of concreting works of foundation.
The payment for this item shall be made as per the actual volumes of
concreting completed but limited to design volume based on unit rates
indicated in the letter of award.

2.8.4 The unit rate of ‘Reinforcement Steel’ shall include supply and placement
of reinforcement steel, stirrups, wire for binding the reinforcement, chairs,
bolsters and spacers etc. as required to complete the foundation work.
The payment of reinforcement steel shall be made based on the working
drawing. In case of actual unit weight of the reinforced steel is found less than
standard unit weight, but within acceptable tolerance variation as per
applicable standard, the same shall be accepted without any
compensation/deduction. However, if unit weight is found to be beyond the
negative (-ve) tolerance limits specified in IS, the material shall be rejected.
Wastage overlaps, spacer bars, chairs, stays, hangers and annealed steel wire
etc. shall not be measured for the payment and cost of these items shall
be deemed to be included in the rates for reinforcement.

No payment shall be made on account of overlaps for joining the reinforcement

in any type of foundations except for Pile & Combined Raft Foundation.

2.9 Setting of Stubs

2.9.1 The stubs shall be set correctly and precisely in accordance with approved
method at the exact location, alignment and levels with the help of stub setting
templates and leveling instruments. Minimum clearance between chimney
concrete level and ground level shall be ensured as per foundation drawing.
Stubs setting shall be done in the presence of Employer’s representative
available at site where required and for which adequate advance intimation
shall be given to Employer by Contractor. Tolerances as per provisions of
IS:5613 shall be allowed for stub setting.
2.9.2 Setting of stub at each location shall be approved by Employer.
2.9.3 Individual Leg stub setting template may also be used by the contractor with
prior approval from Employer Site Incharge. An indicative drawing for individual
leg stub setting template is attached with the specification. Proper care shall be
taken by the contractor for accurate setting & alignment of stub levels

Page 32 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
2.9.4 However, towers with unequal leg extensions , for Multi circuit tower, for
towers with +18/25/30 m Extensions, for raised chimney foundations, for river
crossing towers, Anchor tower and for foundations in highly collapsible soils,
props may be used with complete accuracy and high skilled supervision, subject
to prior approval from Employer/Site Incharge. No recovery shall be made on
account of using Props for stub setting.

2.9.5 Stub Setting Templates / Props

2.9.5.1 Stub setting templates shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost for
all heights of towers. Stub templates shall be of adjustable type. The Contractor
shall also arrange for props for setting of stubs at specific locations where use
of prop is approved by the Employer. Stub templates / props should be painted.
2.9.5.2 The Contractor shall deploy sufficient number of templates / props for timely
completion of the line without any extra cost to Employer.
2.9.5.3 However, the number of template to be deployed shall depend upon type of
terrain condition, number of types of towers etc hence the quantity of
template to be deployed for timely completion of the line shall be finalized in
consultation with site In charge without any extra cost to the Employer.

The number of sets of prop (if permitted) to be arranged, will depend as per
actual site condition and completion schedule of line.
2.9.5.4 One set of each type of stub setting template / props (if used) shall be supplied
to the Employer, on completion of the project, at no extra cost to Employer.
2.10 Mixing, Placing and Compacting of Concrete
2.10.1 The concrete shall be mixed in the mechanical mixer. However, in case of
difficult terrain, hand mixing may be permitted at the discretion of the
Employer. The water for mixing concrete shall be fresh, clean and free from oil,
acids and alkalis. Saltish or blackish water shall not be used.
Alternatively, Ready Mix concrete from batching plant as per IS 4925 can also
be used used with no extra payment and without any recovery. However
Cement content shall be as per IS 456. The ready mix concrete shall conform
to IS:4926. The selection and use of Materials for the ready mix concrete shall
be in accordance with IS:456. The concrete shall be of M25 grade design mix as
per IS:456. The transport of concrete and transportation time shall be as per
IS:4926. Record of delivery ticket information as per Annex.-G of IS:4926 has to
be maintained.

2.10.2 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of material and mix
is uniform in colour and consistency, but in no case the mixing be carried out
for less than two minutes. Normal mixing shall be done close to the foundation
Page 33 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 but exceptionally, in difficult terrain, the concrete may be mixed at the nearest
convenient place. The concrete shall be transported from the place of mixing
to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which shall
prevent the segregation or loss of any ingredient. The concrete shall be placed
and compacted before setting commences.
2.10.3 To avoid the possibility of reinforcement rods being exposed due to
unevenness of the bottom of the excavated pit, a pad of lean concrete 50mm
thick and corresponding to a 1:3:6 nominal mix shall be provided at the bottom
of the pad. The coarse aggregate shall be of 20mm size and shall conform to
IS:383.
2.10.4 Form boxes shall be used for casting all types of foundations except at an
undercut interface for which the adjoining subsurface material shall provide
adequate support. Form boxes shall conform to the shape, lines & dimensions
of the foundation drawing and shall be constructed so as to be rigid during the
placing and compacting of concrete. Contractor shall ensure that Form boxes
are in good condition. Repeated use & maintenance of form box shall be as per
IS 456 & IS 14687.
2.10.5 The concrete shall be laid down in 150mm layers and consolidated well, so that
the cement cream works, up to the top and no honey-combing occurs in the
concrete. A mechanical vibrator shall be employed for compacting the
concrete. However, in case of difficult, terrain, manual compaction may
permitted at the discretion of the Employer. Concreting shall be carried out
continuously. However, in case of unavoidable circumstances, a key
construction joint can be provided at the chimney-pad interface subject to
approval of the Employer or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Number of
such joints shall be kept minimum. Joints shall be kept as straight as possible &
such construction joints should comply with IS 456. There shall not be any
construction joint near stub & cleat portion of frustum. However nothing extra
shall be paid to the Contractor for providing such construction joints. For raised
chimney, joint in concrete shall be of 3 m in chimney portion if casting of full
chimney is not possible in one stretch.
2.10.6 After concreting the chimney portion to the required height, in the top 50 mm
portion between CL & GL coping shall be done after erection of tower and the
top surface should be finished smooth with a slight slope towards the outer
edge for draining rain water.
Further, in case of Wet, Wet cultivated ,PS,FS & WBC foundation before coping
of chimney top portion, three coats of anti-corrosive paint (As recommended
by paint manufacture for structural steel application) of minimum 30-35
microns dry film thickness each shall be applied on the stub in the 50 mm
coping portion as well as upto 350 mm above CL portion. Cost of supply and
application of anti-corrosive paint shall be deemed to included in the unit rate
of concreting.
Page 34 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
2.10.7 Wet locations shall be kept completely dewatered, both during and 24 hours
after placing the concrete, without disturbance of the concrete.
2.10.8 If minor defects in concrete surface is found after the form work has been
removed, the damage shall be repaired with a rich cement sand mortar to the
satisfaction of the Employer before the foundation is back filled.
2.11 Curing
The concrete shall be cured by maintaining the concrete wet for a period of at
least 10 days after placing. Once the concrete has set for 24 hours the pit may
be backfilled with selected moistened soil and well consolidated in layers
thereafter both the backfill earth and exposed chimney shall be kept wet for
the remainder of the prescribed 10 days. The exposed concrete chimney shall
also be kept wet by wrapping gunny bags around it and wetting the bags
continuously during the initial 10 days period.
2.12 Backfilling and Removal of Stub Templates
2.12.1 After opening of formwork and removal of shoring, shuttering etc., backfilling
shall be done with the excavated soil, unless it consists of large boulders /
stones, in which case the boulders / stones shall be broken to a maximum size
of 80 mm or disposed off. At locations where borrowed earth is required for
backfilling, Contractor shall bear the cost of the borrowed earth irrespective of
leads & lift.
2.12.2 The backfilling materials shall be clean and free from organic or other foreign
materials. The earth shall be deposited in various layers, levelled, wetted if
necessary and shall be fully compacted. All excavated earth shall be placed over
the filled in pit to allow further settlement, if any, by gravity.
2.12.3 The backfilling and grading shall be carried to an elevation of about 75mm
above the finished ground level to drain out water. After backfilling 50mm
high, earthen embankment (band) will be made along the sides of excavation
pits and sufficient water will be poured in the backfilling earth for at least 24
hours. After the pits have been backfilled to full depth the stub template can
be removed.
2.13 Benching
When the line passes through hilly/undulated terrain, levelling the ground may
be required for casting of tower footings. All such activities shall be termed
benching and shall include cutting of excess earth and removing the same to a
suitable point of disposal as required by Employer. Benching shall be resorted
to only after approval from Employer. Volume of the earth to be cut shall be
measured before cutting and approved by Employer for payment purposes.
Further, to minimise benching, unequal leg extensions/raised chimney shall be

Page 35 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 considered and provided if found economical. The proposal shall be submitted
by the Contractor with detailed justification to the Employer.

2.14 Protection of Tower and Tower Footing

2.14.1 Tower shall be spotted such that the quantities of revetment are optimum. For
tower locations in undulated terrain such as hill / mountain slopes, options like
use of unequal leg extensions for towers, unequal chimney extensions etc. shall
be explored by the contractor for optimizing the need for revetment &
benching.
2.14.2 The work shall include all necessary stone revetments, concreting and earth
filling above ground level, the clearing from site of all surplus excavated soil,
special measures for protection of foundation close to or in nalas, river bank /
bed, undulated terrain, protection of up hill / down hill slopes required for
protection of tower etc., including suitable revetment or galvanised wire
netting and meshing packed with boulders. The top cover of stone revetment
shall be sealed with 1:2:4 nominal mix concrete. Contractor shall recommend
protection at such locations wherever required. Details of protection of
tower/tower footing are given in drawing enclosed with these specifications for
reference purpose only.
2.14.3 Tower footings shall generally be backfilled using soil excavated at site unless
unsuitable for backfilling. In the latter case, backfilling shall be done with
borrowed earth of suitable quality irrespective of leads and lift. The unit rate
for backfilling quoted in BPS shall include the required lead and consolidation
and leveling of earth after backfilling.
2.14.4 The provisional quantities for protection work of foundations are furnished in
BPS. The unit rates shall also be applicable for any quantity variations during
execution. The same unit rates shall hold good for protection work carried out
on down hills or up hills slopes applicable for the tower locations.
2.14.5 The unit rates for random rubble masonry revetment quoted in price schedule
shall also include excavation & (1:5) random masonry and unit rate for top
sealing with M-15 concrete. For payment purposes the volume of random
rubble masonry revetment shall be measured from bottom to top sealing coat
and paid at the unit rates indicated in the Letter of Award.
No extra payment shall be made for allied works such as excavation for
revetment, packed stone at head of weep holes etc. However, no deduction
shall be made for the volume enclosed by weep holes.
2.14.6 For some of the locations in nalas, river bed or undulated terrain etc., boulders
of minimum. 150mm size bounded and packed in galvanised wire net/mesh of
8 SWG wire and 152 square (maxm.) mesh are to be provided. These stones

Page 36 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 shall be provided in crates size of 2.0mx2.0m or as deemed suitable for a
particular location. Measurement shall be taken in cubic meters and 15%
deduction will be made for void from cage/stack measurements.
2.15 After completion of foundation, stub levels, back to back dimensions, diagonal
dimensions etc. shall be measured jointly by the Engineer of Contractor and
Employer before taking up erection of tower and same shall be recorded for
future reference. In case of any deviations beyond permissible limits as per
IS:5613, the foundation shall be rectified or re-casted by the contractor at his
own cost.
3.0 Tower Erection, Stringing and Installation of Line Materials
3.1 General
3.1.1 The scope of erection work shall include the cost of all labour, tools and plant
such as sagging bridges/working platform, power operated winch machines,
cranes of suitable capacity and height (wherever feasible), tension stringing
equipment, mechanized rope way wherever required for hilly areas for
transportation of materials and all other incidental expenses in connection with
erection and stringing work. The stringing equipment shall be of sufficient
capacity to string the bundle conductors of specified size. Use of Tractor for
tower erection & final sagging shall not be permitted.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation to site of all the
materials to be supplied by the Contractor as well as proper storage and
preservation of the same at his own cost, till such time the erected line is taken
over by the Employer. Similarly, the Contractor shall be responsible for
transportation, proper storage, safe custody, and loss or damage of all
Employer’s supplied items for incorporation in the lines and shall maintain and
render proper account of all such materials at all times. The Contractor shall
reimburse the cost of any of the materials lost or damaged during storage and
erection over and above specified and permitted in Cl 3.13.2 of this section.
3.1.3 Contractor shall set up required number of stores along the line and the exact
location of such stores shall be discussed and agreed upon with the Employer.
Employer during the kick off meeting at site supplied items shall be dispatched
to the stores set up by the Contractor.
3.1.4 Payment for stringing shall be done on the basis of per kilometer and
irrespective of number of tension/suspension towers. However, stringing for
river crossing spans with special towers (Anchor to Anchor) have been given
separately in the BPS. The units of measurement for tower erection and other
line materials, like, earth wire, Hardware fittings and Accessories for conductor
& earth wire are indicated in the BPS.
3.1.5 While handing over the owner supplied OPGW drums, the testing (fibre loss
and length measurement using OTDR) of OPGW in each drum shall be carried
Page 37 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 out by Contractor in presence of OPGW supplier and/or Employer
representatives.
3.1.6 After installation of OPGW, the testing of each section shall be carried out by
Contractor in presence of Employer representatives. In case of any damage
/high loss in the fiber, the total length of that particular section/portion of
OPGW shall be replaced by the contractor and in such case, the de-stringing &
re-stringing shall be carried out by the contractor without any extra cost to
Employer and cost of additional OPGW cable, hardware fittings and joint box, if
any, for replacement of damaged OPGW etc. shall be recovered from the
contractor. However introduction of additional joints in the links due to
replacement of OPGW in damaged portion shall be allowed subject to meeting
the optical link budget.
3.1.7 In case FO Cabling (OPGW, Approach cable etc.) installation is covered under
the scope of package, Site Acceptance Testing (SAT) for FO Cabling shall be
carried out by contractor as per Annexure-I.
3.2 Treatment of Minor Galvanization Damage
Minor defects in hot-dip galvanized members shall be repaired by applying zinc
rich paint to the satisfaction of the Employer before erection.
3.3 Assembly
The Contractor shall give complete details of the erection procedures he
proposes to follow. For erection of towers using crane (wherever feasible)
Cranes of suitable capacity along with other necessary T&P, power operated
winches, Gin pole etc. shall be deployed by the Contractor accordingly.
3.3.1 The method for the erection of towers shall ensure the following:
a) Straining of the members shall not be permitted for positioning. It may,
however, be necessary to match hole positions at joints using tommy
bars not more than 450mm in length;
b) Prior to erection of an upper section, the lower sections shall be
completely braced, and all bolts provided tightened adequately in
accordance with approved drawings to prevent any mishap during tower
erection;
c) All plan diagonals, oblique bracings etc for relevant section of tower shall
be in place prior to assembly of an upper Section;
d) The bolt positions in assembled towers shall be as per IS-5613 (Part
II/Section 2);
e) Tower shall be fitted with number, danger, Bird guard, circuit plate, pole
plate and phase plates as well as anti-climbing device, as described;
f) After complete erection of the tower, all blank holes, except for
additional holes, if any in universal plates and/or in redundant members
at different levels for fixing tower accessories (viz. Tower Number plate,
Page 38 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Danger plate, Phase plate etc.) are to be filled by bolts and nuts of correct
size.
g) The towers shall not be out of vertical by more than 1 in 360 before
stringing is carried out.
3.4 Tightening of Bolts and Nuts
3.4.1 All nuts shall be tightened properly using torque wrench, applying the torque
recommended by manufacturer of bolts & nuts and proper tightening of bolts
& nuts shall be checked by Site-Engineer randomly. Before tightening, it will be
verified that filler washers and plates are placed in relevant gap between
members, bolts of proper size and length are inserted, and one spring washer is
inserted under each nut. In case of step bolts, spring washers shall be placed
under the outer nuts. The tightening shall progressively be carried out from
the top downwards, care being taken that all bolts at every level are tightened
simultaneously. The threads of bolts projecting outside the nuts shall be
punched at their position on the diameter to ensure that the nuts are not
loosened in course of time. If, during tightening, a nut is found to be slipping or
running over the bolt threads, the bolt together with the nut shall be replaced.
3.4.2 The threads of all the bolts projected outside the nuts shall be welded at two
diametrically opposite places; the circular length of each welding shall be at
least 10mm. The welding shall be provided from ground level up to waist level
for single circuit towers and up to bottom cross arm level for double circuit
towers and S/C vertical configuration towers subject to maximum 30 m height
from ground level. After welding the surface of welding shall be cleaned, dried
and made free of oil, grease and corrosion product and on this surface Zinc –
Rich Paint shall be applied by means of a brush according to the paint
manufacturer’s recommendations. Zinc Rich Paint, Pre- mixed type paint, based
on organic/inorganic binders specially formulated for steel surfaces may be
used. The dried film of Zinc Rich Paint should contain a minimum of 90 percent
Zinc Dust by mass. The cost of welding and paint including application of paint
shall be deemed to be included in the erection price.
3.5 Insulator Hoisting
Suspension insulator strings shall be used on Suspension towers and tension
insulator strings on angle and dead end towers. These shall be fixed on all the
towers just prior to the stringing. Damaged insulators and strings, if any, shall
not be employed in the assemblies. Prior to hoisting, all insulators shall be
cleaned in a manner that will not spoil, injure or scratch the surface of the
insulator, but in no case shall any oil be used for that purpose. Also for checking
the soundness of Porcelain Disc insulators, IR measurement using 10 kV (DC)
Megger shall be carried out on 100% insulators (Not applicable for porcelain
longrod insulators/Composite longrod insulators/Glass disc insulators). Corona
control rings/arcing horn shall be fitted in an approved manner. Torque
wrench shall be used for fixing various line materials and components, such as

Page 39 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 suspension clamp for conductor and earth wire, etc., whenever recommended
by the manufacturer of the same.
3.6 Handling of Conductor and Earth wire
3.6.1 Running Out of the Conductors
3.6.1.1 The conductors shall be run out of the drums from the top in order to avoid
damage. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to tower
or conductors during stringing.
3.6.1.2 A suitable braking device shall be provided to avoid damaging, loose running
out and kinking of the conductors. Care shall be taken that the conductors do
not touch and rub against the ground or objects which could scratch or damage
the strands.
3.6.1.3 The sequence of running out shall be from the top down i.e. the earth wire
shall be run out first followed in succession by the conductors. Unbalanced
loads on towers shall be avoided as far as possible. Inner phase of line
conductors shall be strung before the stringing of the outer phases is taken up.
3.6.1.4 The Contractor shall take adequate steps to prevent clashing of sub conductors
until installation of the spacers/spacer dampers. Care shall be taken that sub
conductors of a bundle are from the same Contractor and preferably from the
same batch so that creep behavior of sub conductors remains identical. During
sagging, care shall be taken to eliminate differential sag in sub-conductors as
far as possible. However, in no case shall sag mismatch be more than 25mm.
3.6.1.5 Towers not designed for one sided stringing shall be well guyed and steps taken
by the Contractor to avoid damage. Guying proposal along with necessary
calculations shall be submitted by the Contractor to Employer for approval. All
expenditure related to this work is deemed to be included in the bid price and
no extra payment shall be made for the same.
3.6.1.6 When the transmission lines runs parallel to existing energised power lines, the
Contractor shall take adequate safety precautions to protect personnel; from
the potentially dangerous voltage built up due to electromagnetic and
electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire, conductors and earth wires during
stringing operations.
3.6.1.7 The Contractor shall also take adequate safety precautions to protect
personnel from potentially dangerous voltage build up due to distant electrical
storms.
3.6.2 Running Blocks
3.6.2.1 The groove of the running blocks shall be of such a design that the seat is
semicircular and larger than the diameter of the conductor/earth wire and it
does not slip over or rub against the slides. The grooves shall be lined with
Page 40 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 hard rubber or neoprene to avoid damage to conductor and shall be mounted
on properly lubricated bearings.
3.6.2.2 The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the
cross-arm. All running blocks, especially at the tensioning end will be fitted on
the cross-arms with jute cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the
slings to avoid damage to the slings as well as to the protective surface finish of
the steel work.
3.6.3 Repairs to Conductors
3.6.3.1 The conductor shall be continuously observed for loose or broken strands or
any other damage during the running out operations.
3.6.3.2 Repairs to conductor if accidentally damaged, shall be carried out with repair
sleeve.
3.6.3.3 Repairing of the conductor surface shall be carried out only in case of minor
damage, scuff marks, etc. The final conductor surface shall be clean, smooth
and free from projections, sharp points, cuts, abrasions, etc.
3.6.3.4 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the towers
during stringing.
3.6.4 Crossings
Derricks or other equivalent methods ensuring that normal services need not
be interrupted nor damage caused to property shall be used during stringing
operations where roads, channels, telecommunication lines, power lines and
railway lines have to be crossed. However, shut down shall be obtained when
working at crossings of overhead power lines. The Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the proper handling of the conductor, earth wire and
accessories in the field.
Joint measurement of electrical clearances shall be done by the Engineers of
Employer and contractor after completion of final sagging in major crossing
spans i.e. Railway crossing, River crossing, National/State Highway crossing,
expressway crossing, transmission line crossing (132kV and above voltage level)
by using hand held clearance measurement device/total station. Deviation, if
any, is to be attended immediately. Value of measured electrical clearances is
to be recorded for future reference.
3.7 Stringing of Conductor and Earth wire
3.7.1 The stringing of the conductor shall be done by the control tension method.
The equipment shall be capable of maintaining a continuous tension per bundle
such that the sag for each conductor is about twenty percent greater than the
sags specified in the stringing sag table.

Page 41 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
3.7.2 The contractor shall give complete details of the stringing methods he proposes
to follow. Prior to stringing the Contractor shall submit the stringing charts for
the conductor and earth wire showing the initial and final sags and tension for
various temperatures and spans alongwith equivalent spans in the lines for the
approval of the Employer.
3.7.3 A controlled stringing method suitable for simultaneous stringing of the sub
conductors shall be used. The conductors making up one phase bundle shall
be pulled in and paid out simultaneously. The synchronous stringing of one
phase with six bundle conductors may be carried out by using one TSE of
adequate capacity , However two pullers of adequate capacity ,towing (4+2)
or (3+3) conductors combined with two sets of tensioners may also be used.
These conductors shall be of matched length. Conductors or earth wires shall
not be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for more than 96 hours before
being pulled to the specified sag.
Conductor creep are to be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a
temperature of 300 C for ACSR BERSIMIS, SNOWBIRD & LAPWING / 260 C for
ZEBRA/MOOSE lower than the ambient temperature or by using the initial sag
and tensions indicated in the sag and tension chart.

3.8 Jointing
3.8.1 When approaching the end of a drum length at least three coils shall be left in
place when the stringing operations are stopped. These coils are to be
removed carefully, and if another length is required to be run out, a joint shall
be made as per the specifications.
3.8.2 Conductor splices shall not crack or otherwise be susceptible to damage in the
stringing operation. The Contractor shall use only such equipment/methods
during conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard.
3.8.3 All the joints on the conductor and earth wire shall be of the compression type,
in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer, for which all
necessary tools and equipment like compressors, dies etc., shall be obtained by
the Contractor. Each part of the joint shall be cleaned by wire brush till it is
free of dust or dirt etc., and be properly greased with anti-corrosive compound.
If required and as recommended by the manufacturer, before the final
compression is carried out with the compressors.
Dimensions of compression type joints (Dead end clamps, MS compression
joints, jumper cones, repair sleeves etc.) shall be measured before and after
compression to check compliance as per approved drawings. Record of
dimension measurement shall be maintained by the Contractor. POWERGRID
site engineer shall check the records and verify the dimensions on sample basis.

Page 42 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
3.8.4 All the joints of splices shall be made at least 30 meters away from the tower
structures. No joints or splices shall be made in spans crossing over
state/National highway, railways, power lines and major river crossing. Not
more than one joint per sub conductor per span shall be allowed. The
compression type fittings shall be of the self centering type or care shall be
taken to mark the conductors to indicate when the fitting is centered properly.
During compression or splicing operation; the conductor shall be handled in
such a manner as to prevent lateral or vertical bearing against the dies. After
compressing the joint the aluminium sleeve shall have all corners rounded,
burrs and sharp edges removed and smoothened.
3.8.5 During stringing of conductor to avoid any damage to the joint, the Contractor
shall use a suitable protector for mid span compression joints in case they are
to be passed over pulley blocks/aerial rollers. The pulley groove size shall be
such that the joint alongwith protection can be passed over it smoothly.
3.9 Tensioning and Sagging Operations
3.9.1 The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the approved
stringing charts or sag tables. The “initial” stringing chart shall be used for the
conductor and final stringing chart for the earth wire. The conductors shall be
pulled up to the desired sag and left in running blocks for at least one hour
after which the sag shall be rechecked and adjusted, if necessary, before
transferring the conductors from the running blocks to the suspension clamps.
The conductor shall be clamped within 96 hours of sagging in.
3.9.2 The sag will be checked in the first and the last section span for sections up to
eight spans, and in one additional intermediate span for sections with more
than eight spans. The sag shall also be checked when the conductors have been
drawn up and transferred from running blocks to the insulator clamps.
3.9.3 The running blocks, when suspended from the transmission structure for
sagging, shall be so adjusted that the conductors on running blocks will be at
the same height as the suspension clamp to which it is to be secured.
3.9.4 At sharp vertical angles, conductor and earth wire sags and tensions shall be
checked for equality on both sides of the angle and running block. The
suspension insulator assemblies will normally assume verticality when the
conductor is clamped.
3.9.5 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm whether when
rapid changes in temperature are not likely to occur.
3.10 Clipping In
3.10.1 Clipping of the conductors into position shall be done in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Page 43 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
3.10.2 Jumpers at section and angle towers shall be formed to parabolic shape to
ensure maximum clearance requirements. Pilot suspension insulator strings
shall be used, as per design requirement, to restrict jumper swing to design
values. Balancing weights shall be provided with pilot insulator strings in case
of triple/quad/hexa bundle line and for all lines with composite insulators.
3.10.3 The Jumper drop shall be maintained as per design requirement. Jumper length
calculations for different line deviation angles shall be submitted by the
Contractor to Employer/Site Incharge. The jumpers shall be prepared to the
required length & compressed with jumper pads at site stores. These shall be
assembled with due care taking into consideration conductor bundle
configuration and installed correctly.
3.10.4 Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in position. The
security clip shall be properly opened and sprung into position.

3.11 Fixing of Conductors and Earth wire/OPGW Accessories and Bird Guard
Conductor and earth wire/OPGW accessories including spacers, spacer
dampers (for bundle conductor) and vibration dampers shall be installed by the
Contractor as per the design requirements and manufacturer’s instruction
within 24 hours of the conductor/earth wire clamping. While installing the
conductor and earth wire accessories, proper care shall be taken to ensure that
the surfaces are clean and smooth and that no damage occurs to any part of
the accessories or of the conductors. Torque wrench shall be used for fixing the
Dampers/Spacer Dampers, Suspension Clamps etc. and torque recommended
by the manufacturer of the same shall be applied. Bird guard shall be installed
on all suspension towers. Stringing shall not be considered completed without
installation of Bird guard and all Conductors and Earth wire/OPGW Accessories.

3.11.1 Insulated Conductor sleeve

Insulating sleeve shall be used on bare conductor of Power-line, National

highway and expressway crossing, and Jumper of transposition tower as per
site requirement with approval of Employer site in-charge. Insulating sleeve
shall provide minimum 66kV class insulation. The protective conductor cover
shall be made of silicone rubber. The conductor cover shall be secured with the
application of self-adhesive silicone rubber tape.
Insulating tape and insulating sleeve shall be suitable for conductor operating
temperature of 0 to 180 degree centigrade. The insulating sleeve and insulation
tape shall be Flame, Arc, UV & Ozone Resistant.
Supply & installation charges for insulated conductor sleeve shall be payable
pro-rata basis as per unit rate of respective BPS items under the contract.

Page 44 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
3.12 Replacement
If any replacement is to be effected after stringing and tensioning or during
maintenance, leg member and bracing shall not be removed without first
reducing the tension on the tower by proper guying techniques or releasing of
the conductor. For replacement of cross arms, the conductor shall be suitably
tied to the tower at tension points or transferred to suitable roller pulleys at
suspension points.
3.13 Permitted Extra Consumption of Line materials
3.13.1 The quantity of conductor and earth wire to be incorporated in the line shall be
worked as per the following norms.
Quantify of Conductor = Line length* as per detailed survey x 3 phases x Nos.
of conductor per phase (for Single Circuit Line)
= Line Length* as per detailed survey x 3 phases x
Nos. of conductor per phase x 2 (for Double Circuit
Line)
Quantity of Earthwire = Line length* as per detailed survey xnos.of
groundwires
Quantity of OPGW = Line length* as per detailed survey x no. of OPGW
* For calculation of conductor & Earth wire requirement in hilly stretches,
inclined distance between the towers shall be considered instead of horizontal
distance (considered for line length).
3.13.2 The Contractor shall make every effort to minimise breakage, losses and
wastage of the line materials during erection. However, the Contractor shall be
permitted and extra consumption of line materials up to the limits specified in
Table 5.1 and shall be permitted to dispose of the scrap, if any at the end.
Table 5.1 : Permitted extra consumption of line materials
Item % of permitted extra consumption
Conductor & earth wire 1
Insulators 1*
OPGW (Plain area) 5
OPGW (Hilly area) 7
* will be applicable whenever Insulators are supplied by owner. In case of
Composite Long Rod Insulators, permitted extra consumption will be subject to
physical evidence of damaged insulators otherwise excess insulators are
required to be returned to POWERGRID.

Page 45 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
3.13.3 In case of conductor and earth wire, the maximum permitted extra
consumption limit of one percent is inclusive of sag, jumpering, damage, loss
and wastage etc.
3.13.4 The Conductor can be supplied in Wooden drums/ steel drums and hybrid
drums and the following methodology/procedure to be followed:-
In case of wooden drums for conductor and earthwire, the Contractor shall not
be required to return empty wooden drums to the Employer. The empty drums
shall dispose off by the contractor at his cost.
In case of steel drums and hybrid drums for conductor, the Ownership of the
empty conductor drums shall lie with the conductor supplier who shall
ultimately take back the empty conductor drum from the Project site(s).
Accordingly, erection Contractor is required to return the drums to the
Conductor Supplier at erection contractor’s designated stores after the running
out of conductor from the drum.
The erection contractor shall intimate the Conductor supplier and Employer
regarding empty steel drums at their designated stores. Necessary coordination
for taking back the empty steel/hybrid drums in this regard shall be carried out
by the Conductor Supplier with the erection Contractor. The erection
Contractor shall handle the Steel/Hybrid Drums in a manner so that these
drums can be reused. All efforts shall be made by the erection Contractor to
use the Conductor at the earliest.
Erection Contractor is required to return all the empty steel/hybrid drums.
However, 2% wastage due to transportation & handling etc of steel/hybrid
drums is allowed. The wastage beyond 2% has to be reimbursed by Erection
Contractor.
3.13.5 Any conductor and earth wire drum which has been opened by the Contractor
shall not be taken back by Employer and the unused conductor or earth wire in
such drums may be treated as waste permissible within the overall limits
specified in Table 5.1.
3.13.6 The Contractor shall return to the Employer all Employer supplied material not
incorporated in the works, except those permitted by Employer as scrap in
terms of Table 5.1. Otherwise, the Contractor shall either replenish the excess
material from approved source or pay in respect of such excess materials
which he is unable to return at rates corresponding to the actual cost of
procurement plus (i) 15% for OSM procured under domestically funded
packages; and (ii) 26.5% for OSM procured against packages funded by
multilateral funding agencies. The “cost of procurement” for the above
purpose shall be F O R destination site cost of OSM as per LOA of the
respective packages plus taxes & duties plus price variation (if positive)
applicable as on the date of issuance of TOC for Tower Package. In case of
contract in Foreign currency, Bills clearing (BC) Selling, Market Rate of
Page 46 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Exchange (MRE) established by State Bank of India (SBI) as prevalent on date of
TOC shall be applicable for converting into Indian Rupees.
3.13.7 The quantities of line materials to be supplied by the contractor (i.e. earth wire
and/or OPGW, Hardware fittings & accessories) as indicated in the bill of
quantities are provisional and the actual quantity shall depend upon detailed
survey. Contractor shall be responsible for regulating the supplies of contractor
supplied materials on the basis of actual requirements. The Employer shall
have right, not to take any surplus contractor supplied line materials.
3.13.8 OPGW shall be supplied as per per standard length of 5 kms in plain area and 3
kms in hilly area

3.14 Final checking, Testing and Commissioning

After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be carried out by
the Contractor to ensure that all foundation works, tower erection and
stringing have been done strictly according to the specifications and as
approved by the Employer. All the works shall be thoroughly inspected in order
to ensure that:
a) Sufficient backfilled earth covers each foundation pit and is adequately
compacted;
b) Concrete chimneys and their copings are in good condition and finely
shaped.
c) All tower members are used strictly according to final approved drawing
and are free of any defect or damage whatsoever.
d) All bolts are properly tightened, punched, tack welded and painted with
zinc rich paint;
e) The stringing of the conductors and earth wire has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly
available;
f) All conductor and earth wire accessories are properly installed;
g) All other requirements for completion of works such as fixing of danger
plate, phase plate, number plate, anti-climbing device and aviation signal
have been fulfilled.
h) Wherever required, that proper revetment (erosion protection) is
provided;
i) The original tracings of profile and route alignment as well as tower
design, structural drawings, bill of material and shop drawings of all
towers are submitted to the Employer for reference and record.

Page 47 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 j) The insulation of the line as a whole is tested by the Supplier through
provision of his own equipment, labour etc., to the satisfaction of the
Employer.
k) All towers are properly grounded.
l) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.
3.14.1 The contractor shall submit minimum 4 nos. of high resolution (min. 20MP) geo
tagged photographs of each tower after completion of stringing. Stringing shall
not be considered completed without submission of soft copy of following
photographs of each tower.
i. Complete tower
ii. Close up on Cross arms covering insulators, Hardwares etc.
iii. Forward span focusing on Conductor & corridor
. iv. Foundation

3.14.2 The contractor should also fulfill the requirements of pre-commissioning

procedure as given in Appendix – I to this Specification
3.14.3 After commissioning of the line, thermovision scanning of jumper connections,
dead end joints and mid span compression joints of the complete line shall be
completed by the Contractor by deploying third party agency within three
months of commissioning of the line using minimum 640 X 480 pixel resolution
day time thermovision Camera alongwith suitable lense. Details of the
proposed third party agency (including past experience) shall be submitted by
the Contractor to POWERGRID site incharge/RHQ. The thermovision scanning
shall be carried out under supervision of Contractor & POWERGRID site
engineers. Location and span wise report of thermovision scanning shall be
submitted by the Contractor to POWERGRID site incharge. Identified defects, if
any, shall be rectified by the Contractor within contractual defect liability
period.

4.0 Field Quality Plan

All field activity shall be carried out in accordance with Standard Field Quality
plan (SFQP: DOC. No. C/QA&I/SFQP/TL/030, Rev-5) as given in Appendix – II to
this Specification.

5.0 Manufacturing Quality Plan

Tower manufacturing shall be carried out in accordance with
Standardized Manufacturing Quality plan as given in Appendix–III to this
section of the Specification.

Page 48 of 48
SECTION - IV, STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
REVISION – 6, March-2018 (with modifications upto June-2018)
 Appendix-I

PRE-COMMISSING PROCEDURE

&

FORMATS

FOR

TRANSMISSION LINES
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

1.0 INTRODUCTION
This document includes over all procedure, safety rules, Statutory Requirements,
dispatch procedures, switching sequences, observations, acceptance criteria and
documentation of test results for pre-commissioning procedures for transmission
lines.

The detailed inspection and handing over documents are required to be checked for
the entire length of transmission line before Energization. Digital Photographs of
critical locations using high resolution digital camera need to be taken by taking
over team and preserved as part of taking over record.
2.0 OVERALL PROCEDURE
First, it is to be ascertained that the transmission line to be energized is ready for
operation and has been properly handed over (released) in writing. This will include
all safety aspects, Electrical inspector clearance, PTCC clearance, statutory
clearance, regulation/ system operator requirement and final inspection, if any.
Instructions for the work and supervision are given by the test leader (Line in
charge). However, regular operators will execute all switching and operational
activities.
Line charging instructions received from the concerned department
(CTU/Engineering) should be clearly understood by the Line in charge and doubts, if
any, are to be got clarified prior to the energization of the line.
Once, the line is handed over for charging, no work shall be permitted without a
valid WORKPERMIT.
Concerned department’s (CTU/Engineering) recommendations, system operator/
regulation requirements are to be followed before putting the system into
continuous operation.
3.0 SAFETY PROCEDURES
Energization implies an abrupt and serious change of the working conditions in the
line.
In order to avoid serious accidents, thorough information must be imparted to all
personnel involved in the construction of transmission line. In-charge of the
Transmission line (Divisional head) must ensure that due publicity has been made to
the public in all the villages/ areas along the line route cautioning them against
climbing the towers etc. and that the line is proposed to be charged on notified
date. It is also to be confirmed that all the AGENCIES involved in construction
activities shall not carry out any job on the said line without a valid WORK PERMIT.
It shall be ensured before charging that all men, material, Tools & plants and any
temporary earthing on any part of the entire length of line are removed.

Page 1 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

It must be ensured that any power supply/ low voltage charging used as “anti-theft
measure” must be disconnected and isolated to avoid accidental connection.
All equipment tests and pre-commissioning tests must have been completed,
reconnected (in case cables were isolated for testing purpose) and documented as
per prescribed format.
The system must be formally declared ready for Energization and handed over for
operation in writing.
4.0 INSPECTION
Before the line is scheduled to be handed over for the pre-commissioning/
Energization, the same shall be inspected by representatives of POWERGRID and
Construction Agency. Such inspection shall include:
i) Right of way/ way leave/ electrical clearance
ii) Foundation and Revetments/ Protection Work
iii) Tower and Tower accessories
iv) Hardware fittings
v) Insulators
vi) Conductors and Earth wire
vii) Accessories for conductor and Earth wires
viii) Aviation Warning Signals (Lights/globules/painting)
4.1 RIGHT OF WAY / WAY LEAVE / ELECTRICAL CLEARANCE
4.1.1 Right of way/ Way leave clearance

Maximum width of Right of way of transmission line in forest area and minimum
electrical clearances between Conductor & trees shall be as per MOE&F guidelines
under Forest conservation Act & Rules for laying of transmission lines through forest
area.

(i) As per existing MOE&F guidelines/ POWERGRID specification, the maximum

width of right of way for the transmission lines on forest land shall be as
follows:
Transmission Voltage (KV) Width of Right of Way (Mts)
66 18
132 27
220 35
400 S/C 52
400 D/C 46
765 S/C (Delta) 64
765 S/C (Horiz) 85

Page 2 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
765 D/C 67
+/-500 HVDC 52
+/-800 HVDC 69
1200 S/C 89

(ii) Minimum electrical clearance between Conductor & Trees considering

Maximum sag & swing of Conductor (minimum 35 deg.) shall be as follows.
Voltage (KV) Minimum clearance between
conductors and trees (Mts)
66 3.4
132 4.0
220 4.7
400 5.5
765 9.0
+/-500 HVDC 7.4
+/-800 HVDC 10.7
1200 13

4.1.2 Electrical Clearance

All statutory electrical clearance of transmission lines w.r.t. ground, building,

Structures, Power line crossings, Railway & Road crossings etc. as stipulated under
CEA’s Regulations, 2010 (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply) &
POWERGRID specification shall be ensured.

4.1.2.1 Ground clearance shall be as per clause 58.0 Part-III, Sec-4 of CEA’s Regulations,
2010 (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply) & POWERGRID specification
under Sec-I & Sec-III, Vol-II.
Further Electrical clearances (Horizontal as well as vertical clearances) from
building/structures shall be as per clause 61.0, Part-III, Sec-4 CEA’s Regulations,
2010 (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply).
The ground profile at the time of commissioning shall be checked with the profile
approved at the time of check survey.
Ground clearance of lowest conductors at critical points shall be checked in the field
from any of the prevalent method and the values of ground clearance at these
critical points including all power line, railway line and road crossings shall be
recorded in the prescribed format.
In case of hilly Terrain and for building clearance, the side clearance from
conductors and jumpers at critical points shall also be checked and recorded for all
phases of conductor/ earth wire towards hillI building side.
4.1.2.2 Clearance between line crossings each other, the minimum clearances between the
Power line crossing each other shall be as per 69.0, Part-III,Sec-4, of CEA’s

Page 3 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
Regulations 2010 (Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply) and POWERGRID
specification under Sec-III, Vol-II.
4.1.2.3 Electrical clearance from railway tracks shall be as stipulated under Sec-III, Vol-II of
Technical Specification.
4.1.2.4 Clearance between conductors and Earth wire at mid span
Availability of required vertical clearances (as per design & POWERGRID
Specification) between conductor and earth wire shall be ensured through random
checking. Minimum clearances between conductor and earthwire at mid-span shall
be as indicated below:

Voltage (kV) 132 220 400 765 +/- 500 +/- 800
HVDC HVDC
Minimum mid span 6100 8500 9000 9000 8500 12000(pole)
clearance (mm) 6100(DMR)

Record of such random checks shall be the part of pre-commissioning records.

4.2 FOUNDATION AND REVETMENTS/ PROTECTION WORK

4.2.1 FOUNDATION:
There shall not be any damage/ uneven settlement of foundations. For this,
tolerances in levels of all four stubs should not exceed the criteria provided in the
Annexure - C of IS -5613 (Part -3/Section 2): 1989.
It is to be ensured that back filling of foundation is properly done. Soil shall be filled
over all legs up to ground level.
Extra surface earth after foundation back filling shall be removed from legs of the
tower.
Any crack or break in chimney, if found, shall be repaired/rectified with approval of
site In-charge.
4.2.2 REVETMENTS I PROTECTION:
Cracks/ damages to revetments shall be repaired/ rectified with approval of site In-
charge.
Wherever revetments are provided, weep holes shall have slope such as to flush out
the deposited water away from tower platform.
In case of hilly terrain, the benching area should be leveled properly. The area
around tower shall have proper slope for drainage of rainwater.
4.3 TOWER AND TOWER ACCESSORIES
4.3.1 Normal Tower
After completion of a transmission line, all the towers shall be thoroughly checked
before charging the line. Special attention shall be given to the following points:

Page 4 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
Deformed/ Buckled/ Missing/ Rusted Members and Nuts and Bolts
It is to be ensured that no members are bent, deformed or rusted in towers and if
so, the same shall be replaced.
If any member is found missing, a new member shall be fixed as per erection
drawing of Towers.
Nuts shall be sufficiently tightened for the required Torque. Minimum 2/ 3 complete
threads shall be projected outside the nut. All bolts shall have their nuts facing
outside of the tower for Horizontal connection and Downwards for Vertical
connections.
Bolts shall be punched as per the specification and nuts shall be properly tack
welded. It shall be ensured that the circular length of each welding shall be at least
10 mm. Proper zinc rich paint (90% zinc contain) shall be applied on welded portion.
It shall be ensured that all tower members are fixed and tightened properly. All
extra blank holes on tower members are filled with correct size of nuts & bolts.
Digital Photographs (from different angles) of such conformance for atleast 5%
towers are to be taken by taking over team on random basis and preserved with
taking over records.
4.3.2 Special Towers
In addition to the above checks for towers, ladders and platforms provided in
special towers shall be properly tightened and no foreign material shall be left out
on such platforms.

4.3.3 Earthing of Towers

Ensure that proper earthing of tower has been done and earthing strip is neither
damaged nor broken and is properly fixed to the stub.
In case of counter poise earthing, it is to be ensured that earth wire is sufficiently
buried in the ground and nowhere; it has drag out during cultivation. The length of
counterpoise shall be as per Technical specification.
Before charging of the line, ensure that earth impedance of each tower is below 10
ohms. If Earth impedance of any tower (before stringing) has been recorded higher
than 10 ohm, additional counterpoise type earthing or chemical earthing shall be
provided.
Earthing of special towers shall be verified as per approved drawings applicable for
special towers/ special foundation. (In case of anchor foundation bolt/ anchor plate
welded with last leg of special tower)
4.3.4 Tower accessories
All danger plates, number plates, circuit plates and phase plates shall be in position
as per the specification and properly tightened.
All phase plates shall be fixed in correct phase sequence. Special care may be taken
at transposition towers for indicating the correct phase sequence.

Page 5 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
It shall be ensured that the anti-climbing device (ACD) is provided at the suitable
height of tower. In case of barbed wire type ACD, barbed wire shall be tightly fixed.
It shall be ensured that the step bolts (for normal towers) are provided up to the
peak of tower. Any missing step bolts shall be replaced.
Fixing of birds guards shall be ensured at all towers to prevent birds perching on
suspension insulator strings.
4.4 HARDWARE FITIINGS
Tightening of all bolts and nuts are to be checked up to specified torque. Check
fixing of all security clips (W/R type clips).
Surface condition of corona control rings should be smooth. Distance/ alignment
between tower side arcing horn (wherever applicable) and line side arcing horn/
corona control ring should be as per approved drawings.
Jumpers in the tension tower shall be properly bolted with the tension clamp and
form a parabolic shape in order to achieve adequate clearance from steel super
structure.
To restrict the swing of jumpers, pilot strings on tension towers with high angle of
deviation should be provided as per approved drawings.
4.5 INSULATORS
All damaged/ broken insulator discs/ Longrod insulator units shall be replaced.
Unusual deflection in suspension strings, if observed, shall be rectified.
It is to be ensured before charging that insulators are clean. IR value of individual
porcelain insulator disc of at least 5% insulators at random shall be checked by 5/ 10
kV Megger and it shall not be less than 2000 Mega Ohm.
4.6 CONDUCTORS & EARTH WlRES
4.6.1 Conductor
Surface of the conductors shall be free from scratches/rubs.
Ensure that conductor strands are not cut and opened up. Wherever strands are
found cut/ damaged/ scratched, they must be repaired with repair sleeves/ repair
protective rods in case the no. of damaged strands are within specified limits
(normally up to 1/6th nos of strands in the outer layer) for lines up to 220 kV and
maximum 2 strands in case of 400 kV and higher voltage level.
4.6.2 Earth wire
Ensure that strands of earth wire have no cuts.
4.7 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRES
4.7.1 Joints
All joints on conductor/ earth wires shall be away from the tower at a distance of at
least 30 meters or as provided in the Technical specification (TS).

Page 6 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
Ensure that not more than one joint in a conductor is provided in one span.
Ensure that no mid span joint is provided in major crossings for main roads, railway
crossing and major rivers etc. or as per the provision of technical specification.
Ensure that all mid span joints on conductors / earth wire and repair sleeves of
compression type are free from sharp edges, rust and dust. Wherever grease is
specified the same shall be applied in the joints.

4.7.2 Clamping
Ensure that conductor is not over tightened in the suspension clamps.

4.7.3 Spacers, vibration dampers and copper bonds

Placement and number of spacers/ spacer-dampers on the bundle conductors on
each phase shall be verified as per spacer/ spacer damper placement chart.
Damaged/ missing spacers/ spacer-dampers shall be replaced and loose/ displaced
spacers/ spacer-dampers shall be tightened/ relocated.
Spacing of Vibration dampers from the tower and spacing between damper to
damper shall be verified as per the damper placement chart. All loose/ displaced VD
shall be properly tightened/ relocated and missing VDs shall be provided.
It is to be ensured that no copper bond is loose/ missing.
4.7.4 Jumpers
Verify Electrical clearance of jumpers to tower body as per design. All jumpers shall
be checked for proper tightening. In case, jumpers (Conductor/ Earth wire) are
found loose, it shall be tightened properly before line charging. Digital Photographs
of such conformance for atleast 10% jumper connections are to be taken by taking
over team on random basis and preserved with taking over records.
4.7.5 Foreign material
Ensure that all foreign materials like dead bird, fallen tree branches; bird nests etc.
on conductors, earth wires, jumper, insulator string, cross arms are removed.
4.7.6 Others
It shall be ensured that all temporary/ local earthing, guys, T & P (Tools and Plants),
foreign material and other loose material, which were used during stringing/ tower
erection, have been removed.
If, there is any change in the ground profile before commissioning of line from the
approved profile, the extra earth/ obstruction/ temporary sheds/ any other
construction shall be removed.
4.8 AVIATION WARNING OBSTRUCTION SIGNALS (LIGHTS/ GLOBULES/ PAINTING)
It shall be ensured that following measures have been taken in the line/ Towers
falling within obstruction zone of civil aviation and defense establishments as per IS-
5613, ICAO Guidelines and POWERGRID specification.

Page 7 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
4.8.1 Day markers
4.8.1.1 Structure marking: The structure portion excluding cross arms above 45 meter
height shall be painted in alternate bands of international orange and white colours
as per IS-5613 & ICAO Guidelines.
4.8.1.2 Line markers may be provided as per the technical specification.
4.8.2 Night markers
It shall be ensured that proper aviation lights at the peak level/ at specified heights
of towers have been provided along with Solar panels/ Battery banks/ Control
cubicles and other accessories as per specification. The functioning of lights with
simulation shall be checked/ verified.
5.0 STATUTORY REQUIREMENT
5.1 The concerned authorities shall be informed before commissioning the line and
their approval shall be obtained in accordance with CEA’s Regulations, 2010
(Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply)
5.2 Before charging of the line, PTCC approval from concerned authority shall be
obtained.
6.0 HANDING OVER
The transmission line shall be inspected prior to Energization and a formal handing
over document to be jointly signed by the representative of SUPPLIER (if available),
ERECTION AGENCY and POWERGRID. However all contractual taking over has to be
resolved separately as per the terms and conditions of the contract. Handing over
shall be limited to the completion of Erection and ready for Energization. The
relevant format No- OS/COMM/LINE/1 for handing over is also a part of
documentation.
Any outstanding points or remaining activities are to be listed and signed jointly by
the representatives of POWERGRID and ERECTION agency as per the Format No:
OS/COMM/LINE/2. These documents are also to be retained at line office with a
copy to Regional office. The remaining activities outstanding points are classified in
the following category.
Details of the SECTIONS:

A. List of outstanding activities remaining in any part of the line

B. A list of temporary arrangements introduced.

C. Check list of records properly documented, completed and signed as per Format
NO: OS/COMM/LINE/1
D. Original tracing of Profile, Route Alignment, Tower Design, Structural Drawings,
Bill of Materials, Shop Drawings, Stringing charts (initial and final as applicable)
etc. of all towers/ line submitted to POWERGRID.
After resolving the above mentioned outstanding activities or with only minor

Page 8 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
remaining points which do not influence on charging of line, handing over of the
transmission line shall be accepted by the pre-commissioning team. Handing over of
transmission line for Energization with or without remaining activities shall be made
by the line in-charge to the commissioning in charge in writing as per the Format
No. OS/COMM/LINE/3.
Shortcomings noticed during inspection, "List of outstanding activities" shall be
recorded as per Format No: OS/COMM/LINE/2 and a copy of the shortcomings
noticed is to be given to the responsible parties like SUPPLIER(s) and ERECTION
AGENCY etc. for corrective action to be taken on a time bound schedule.
7.0 PROTECTIVE SYSTEM
Before energization, it must be ascertained that all protective systems for the line to
be energized are operative.
This includes confirmation that the protections have been properly tested and tests
have been documented as per Pre-Commissioning Procedure laid down by the
utility for S/S Bay Equipment.
It also includes verification by inspection or otherwise, if necessary by repetition of
trip test, that the protections are actually functionally enabled. This verification
serves to prevent that energization takes place of a line where a protection has
been disabled for test or other reason.
8.0 DISPATCH PROCEDURES
All operational activities (switching etc.) must be coordinated and communicated
with the system dispatcher i.e. CPCC/ RLDC/ NLDC. In this respect the general
procedures already established by POWERGRID, Regulator and System Operator will
be followed.
9.0 SWITCHING PROCEDURES
For each activity, the instructions to the operators and the communications to the
dispatchers will be made in writing or by confirmed telephone messages. The
switching procedures first to be properly documented step by step and understood
by everybody involved in the switching operation prior to the energization. Any
clarification required in the procedures must be resolved. The format established by
the utility for switching orders and operational data logging shall be followed. Each
and every activity must be listed and described, so that complete information is
available for detailed investigation, if required in future.
10.0 TESTING AND MEASUREMENT
10.1 Earth Resistance Measurement
Earth Resistance measurement is to be carried out using Earth Resistance Tester.
The values should be below 10 ohm. If the value is higher than 10 ohm, additional
counterpoise type earthing shall be provided.

Above measurements may preferably be carried out during dry climate.

Page 9 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

10.2 Before commissioning of the lines following tests may be carried out:
10.2.1 Offline Signature Analysis
Offline signature analysis shall be taken before commissioning to ensure healthiness
of transmission line before charging. This will be preserved for future reference.

10.2.2 Insulation Resistance Test

This test may be carried out using 5 kV or 10 kV megger preferably power driven to
ascertain the insulation condition of the line. If, 5 kV megger is used for insulation
resistance measurement, it shall be ensured that the induced voltage (CVT reading)
is less than the instrument withstanding capacity to avoid the possibility of damage
of instrument.
This Test is to be carried out prior to the continuity test.

10.2.3 Conductor Continuity test:

10.2.3.1 Objective of this test is to verify that each conductor of the overhead line is properly
connected.
A simple method of continuity test is illustrated below. Once the insulation test is
completed and the results confirm no short circuit, carryout the following testing
using 5kV/ 10 kV megger:

SENDING END RECEIVING END RESULTS (OHMS)

CLOSE R- Ph ground switch MEGGER R-Ph ZERO/ LOW
OPEN Y- Ph ground switch MEGGER Y-Ph HIGH
OPEN B- Ph ground switch MEGGER B-Ph HIGH
OPEN R- Ph ground switch MEGGER R-Ph HIGH
CLOSE Y- Ph ground switch MEGGER Y-Ph ZERO/ LOW
OPEN B- Ph ground switch MEGGER B-Ph HIGH
OPEN R- Ph ground switch MEGGER R-Ph HIGH
OPEN Y- Ph ground switch MEGGER Y-Ph HIGH
CLOSE B- Ph ground switch MEGGER B-Ph ZERO/ LOW
(All Ground Switch in open condition)

If the above test results are satisfactory, it confirms the continuity of the line.
10.2.3.2 The continuity Test of the line with proper phase indication or phase marking can be
checked by continuity test as described below:

Page 10 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
RECEIVING END
SENDING END RESULTS (OHMS)
MEGGER BETWEEN
R PHASE & Y PH ZERO OR LOW
CONNECT R & Y PHASE
Y PHASE & B PH HIGH
B-PHASE & ALL GS OPEN
B PHASE & R PH HIGH
R PHASE & Y PH HIGH
CONNECT R & B PHASE
Y PHASE & B PH HIGH
Y-PHASE & ALL GS OPEN
B PHASE & R PH ZERO OR LOW
R PHASE & Y PH HIGH
CONNECT Y & B PHASE
Y PHASE & B PH ZERO OR LOW
R-PHASE & ALL GS OPEN
B PHASE & R PH HIGH

If the test results are satisfactory, it confirms that marking of the phases are in
order.
10.2.3.3 Phase Sequence
Once, the line is charged from one end, without closing the Breaker at the other
end, the Phase sequence is to be checked from the CVT output using Phase
Sequence Meter. If other charged feeders are available, Phase sequence to be
RECHECKED by the measurement of secondary voltage of both the Feeders (New
line & available charged line).
Let the secondary Voltage of CVT is 110 volts (ph to ph) for both the Circuit. In case
of correct Phase Sequence the voltage reading shall be as follows:
NEW CIRCUIT OLD CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
R – Phase R – Phase 0
R – Phase Y – Phase 110
R – Phase B – Phase 110
Y- Phase R – Phase 110
Y- Phase Y – Phase 0
Y- Phase B – Phase 110
B- Phase R – Phase 110
B- Phase Y – Phase 110
B- Phase B – Phase 0

In case the results are not matching the phase sequence is to be rechecked and
reconfirmed before closing the breaker.
11.0 ENERGIZATION
Execution of the energization is simply the last event in the switching sequence,
switching of the close control button for the relevant circuit breaker.
12.0 DE-ENERGIZATION
Instructions about de-energization will be given only if, this is part of the test

Page 11 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
otherwise de-energization will be considered part of regular operation.
13.0 OBSERVATIONS AND DURATION
Visual and audible inspection (look and listen) of the associated equipment and
reading of permanent instrumentation will be made.
The system shall be kept charged for the duration prescribed as per CERC
regulation. During this time, continuous monitoring and inspection will be
maintained in control room, auxiliary systems areas and switchyards.
This will include frequent, scheduled inspection of all equipment and reading of all
permanent instruments, recorders and surge arrester counters, especially system
parameters as per standard procedures adopted by POWERGRID.
14.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
Neither insulation breakdown nor protective system actions must occur. No
irregular equipment behavior noise, vibration, high temperature is permitted.
Corona discharges may not be “unreasonable”. Local discharges that may be at-
tributable to sharp points, shall be carefully located and recorded. After termination
of Energization, the equipment shall be closely inspected and the points rounded or
covered.
No unscheduled changes of system or of equipment are permitted during the 8 hour
energized condition.
15.0 DOCUMENTATION
Switching and operational activities will be recorded in regular manner in the opera-
tor’s log. Similarly all readings of permanent instruments are also to be recorded.
Copies of this log notes on special observations from inspections and other
measurements will constitute the test records.

Page 12 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
ANNEXURE – 1

CENTRAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY

(Measures relating to safety and Electric Supply)
Regulations, 2010

(The relevant portion of the CEA’s Regulations, 2010 is reproduced below)

58. Clearance above ground of the lowest conductor of overhead lines.-

(1) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected across a street shall at
any part thereof be at a height of less than-

(i) for lines of voltage not exceeding 650 Volts - 5.8 metres
(ii) for lines of voltage exceeding 650 Volts but not exceeding 33 kV- 6.1 metres

(2) No conductor of an overhead line, including service lines, erected along any street shall at
any part thereof be at a height less than-

(i) for lines of voltage not exceeding 650 Volts - 5.5 metres
(ii) for lines of voltage exceeding 650 Volts but not exceeding 33 kV- 5.8 metres

(3) No conductor of an overhead line including service lines, erected elsewhere than along or
across any street shall be at a height less than –

(i) for lines of voltage upto and including 11,000 Volts,if bare - 4.6 metres
(ii) for lines of voltage upto and including 11,000 Volts, if insulated - 4.0 metres
(iii) for lines of voltage exceeding 11,000 Volts but not exceeding 33 kV - 5.2 metres

(4) For lines of voltage exceeding 33 kV the clearance above ground shall not be less than 5.2
metres plus 0.3 metre for every 33,000 Volts or part thereof by which the voltage of the line
exceeds 33,000 Volts;

Provided that the minimum clearance along or across any street shall not be less than 6.1
metres.
(5) For High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) lines, the clearance above ground shall not be less
than:-

Sl. No. DC Voltage(kV) Ground Clearance (mtrs.)

1 100 kV 6.1
2 200 kV 7.3
3 300 kV 8.5
4 400 kV 9.4
5 500 kV 10.6
6 600 kV 11.8
7 800 kV 13.9

(6) Ground clearances shall be as specified in scheduIe-X.

Page 13 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
61. Clearances from buildings of lines of voltage exceeding 650 V.-

(1) An overhead line shall not cross over an existing building as far as possible and no building
shall be constructed under an existing overhead line.

(2) Where an overhead line of voltage, exceeding 650 V passes above or adjacent to any
building or part of a building, it shall have on the basis of maximum sag a vertical clearance
above the highest part of the building immediately under such line, of not less than-

(i) for lines of voltages exceeding 650 Volts upto and 3.7 metre
including 33,000 Volts-
(ii) for lines of voltages exceeding 33 kV 3.7 metere plus 0.30
metre for every
additional 33,000 Volts
or part thereof

(3) The horizontal clearance between the nearest conductor and any part of such building
shall, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, be not less than-

(i) for lines of voltages exceeding 650 V upto and 1.2 metres
including 11,000 Volts-
(ii) for lines of voltages exceeding 11,000 V and up 2.0 metres
to and including 33,000 V-
(iii) for lines of voltages exceeding 33 kV- 2.0 metres plus 0.3 metre for
every additional 33kV or
part thereof

(4) For High Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) systems, vertical clearance and horizontal
clearance, on the basis of maximum deflection due to wind pressure, from buildings shall
be maintained as below:

Sl. No DC Voltage (kV) Vertical Clearance Horizontal

(mtrs.) Clearance (mtrs.)
1. 100 kV 4.6 2.9
2. 200 kV 5.8 4.1
3. 300 kV 7.0 5.3
4. 400 kV 7.9 6.2
5. 500 kV 9.1 7.4
6. 600 kV 10.3 8.6
7. 800 kV 12.4 10.7

(5) Vertical and horizontal clearances shall be as specified in schedule-X.

Explanation:- For the purpose of this regulation the expression “building” shall be deemed to
include any structure, whether permanent or temporary.

Page 14 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

Page 15 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
69. Lines crossing or approaching each other and lines crossing street and road-
Where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to any telecommunication line, the owner of
either the overhead line or the telecommunication line, whoever lays his line later, shall arrange
to provide for protective devices or guarding arrangement and shall observe the following
provisions, namely:-
(i) when it is intended to erect a telecommunication line or an overhead line which will cross or
be in proximity to an overhead line or a telecommunication line, as the case may be, the
person proposing to erect such line shall give one month’s notice of his intention so to do
along with the relevant details of protection and drawings to the owner of the existing line;

(ii) guarding shall be provided where lines of voltage not exceeding 33 kV cross a road or street;

(iii) where an overhead line crosses or is in proximity to another overhead line, guarding
arrangements shall be provided so to guard against the possibility of their coming into
contact with each other;

(iv) where an overhead line crosses another overhead line, clearances shall be as under:-

(Minimum clearances in metres between lines crossing each other)

SI. No. Nominal System 11-66 kV 110-132 kV 220 kV 400 kV 800 kV

Voltage
1. Low and Medium 2.44 3.05 4.58 5.49 7.94
2. 11-66 kV 2.44 3.05 4.58 5.49 7.94
3. 110-132 kV 3.05 3.05 4.58 5.49 7.94
4. 220 kV 4.58 4.58 4.58 5.49 7.94
5. 400 kV 5.49 5.49 5.49 5.49 7.94
6. 800 kV 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94 7.94

Provided that no guardings are required when line of voltage exceeding 33 kV crosses over
another line of 250 V and above voltage or a road or a tram subject to the condition that
adequate clearances are provided between the lowest conductor of the line of voltage exceeding
33 kV and the top most conductor of the overhead line crossing underneath the line of voltage
exceeding 33 kV and the clearances as stipulated in regulation 58 from the topmost surface of
the road maintained;
(v) where an overhead direct current (DC) line crosses another overhead line, clearances shall be
as under:-

Page 16 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
(Minimum clearances in metres between AC and DC lines crossing each other)

SI. Sysytem Voltage 100 kV 200 kV 300 kV 400 kV 500 kV 600 kV

No. AC/DC DC DC DC DC DC DC
1 Low and Medium AC 3.05 4.71 5.32 6.04, 6.79 7.54
2 11-66 kV AC 3.05 4.71 5.32 6.04 6.79 7.54
3 110-132 kV AC 3.05 4.71 5.32 6.04 6.79 7.54
4 220 kV AC 4.58 4.71 5.32 6.04 6.79 7.54
5 200 kV DC 4.71 4.71 5.32 6.04 6.79 7.54
300 kV AC 5.32 5.32 5.32 6.04 6.79 7.54
400 kV AC 5.49 5.49 5.49 6.04 6.79 7.54
400 kV DC 6.04 6.04 6.04 6.04 6.79 7.54
500 kV DC 6.79 6.79 6.79 6.79 6.79 7.54
600 kV DC 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54 7.54
(vi) a person erecting or proposing to erect a line which may cross or be in proximity with an
existing line, shall provide arrangements on his own line or require the owner of the other
overhead line to provide guarding arrangements as referred to in clause (iii) and (iv);
(vii) in all cases referred to in this regulation the expenses of providing the guarding
arrangements or protective devices shall be borne by the person whose line was last
erected;
(viii) where two lines cross, the crossing shall be made as nearly at right angles as the nature of
the case admits and as near the support of the line as practicable, and the support of the
lower line shall not be erected .below the upper line;
(ix) the guarding arrangements shall ordinarily be carried out by the owner of the supports on
which it is made and he shall be responsible for its efficient maintenance.

Page 17 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
CHECK LIST FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
FORMAT NO: OS/COMM/LlNE/1

Name of line Circuit Date of Energisation

A: GERERAL DATA AND INFORMATION:

I Region
II TL Office
III Voltage rating 132 220 400 +/- +/- 765 KV
500 800
IV Type of circuit S/C D/C S/C ON D/C TOWER M/C
V Length of Line KM
VI Total Nos. of Towers NOS.
VII Tower Location No
VIII Tower Type 0-2 2-15 15-30 30-60 SPL OTHERS
For S/C A B C D
For D/C DA DB DC DD
For M/C QA QB QC QD
Normal Extn. (Meters) +3 +6 +9 +12 +18 +25
Leg Extn. (Meters) 1.5 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5 9.0
IX Tower Foundation DRY WET PS FS BC SR HR PILE
Type
X Type Of Conductor Panther Zebra Moose Bersimis Others

XI No of conductors Single Twin Triple Quad Other

in bundle
XII Vulnerable Location Yes No
XIII Crossing Details
Location River Power Railway MS compression joint Repair sleeve
no. line line Circuit-1 Circuit-2 Circuit-1 Circuit-2
R Y B R Y B R Y B R Y B
(Increase) (Name) (name & (name)
(Decrease) Voltage)

Page 18 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
XIV DETAILED CHECK LIST

SL DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS

NO YES NO Record Deficiencies If Any
1 Foundation
a Check any damage/ uneven settlement
of foundation
b Check back filling of foundation is
properly filled up to the ground level of
all legs
c Check surface earth/ concrete after
foundation casting is removed from
platform of the tower
d Check crack or break in chimney
e Check crack or damage to retaining
wall/ revetment and proper weep holes
are provided for flushing water
f Check that all foundation chimneys are
covered with soil and compacted
specially in hilly terrain and river/ nalas
banks up to ground level
g Check cliff-in foundation levels are
within limit
2 Tower
a Check for deformed/ rusted or
damaged tower members
b Check for missing tower members

c Check for missing bolts & nuts

d Check for tightening of all bolts & nuts

e Check for punching, tack welding (at

least 10 mm circular length) and zinc
coating of bolts & nuts
f Check filling of extra holes in tower
members with bolts & nuts
g Check verticality of tower

h Check that no tower leg is suspected to

be in sinking land or soil erosion field of
river bank, if so, proper adequate
protection has been provided
i Check fixing & visibility of all tower
accessories namely danger/ number/
circuit/ phase plate/ step bolts and anti
climbing device (ACD)

Page 19 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
j Check correct sequence of fixing of
phase/ circuit plate at transposition
towers
k Digital Photographs of critical locations
taken and preserved
l Digital Photographs (from different
angles) indicating all tower member are
properly fixed using correct size of bolts
for atleast 5% towers on random basis
and preserved
3 Removal of T&P and foreign materials
a Check temporary Earthing/ Guys used
during stringing and jumpering are
removed
b Check all foreign materials on tower
e.g. dense spider, webs, any handling
rod/ wire, kites, bird nests and left over
T&P on tower/ cross arm are removed
c Check that all the insulator discs/
Longrod insulator units are free from
any damage
d Check for unusual deflection in
suspension strings and if found, should
be rectified
e Check proper aviation warning signals
on towers above 45 meter height
f Check that red & white paints have
been applied on towers which fall in
aviation route
4 Hardware fittings
a Check that proper fixing of hardware
fittings like corona control ring/ arcing
horns etc. are provided as per the
approved drawing/ specification
b Check the condition of cotter pins and
ensure that proper size cotter pins have
provided as per the approved drawing.
c Check that all insulators are thoroughly
clean
5 Conductor and its accessories
a Check that the conductors/ sub-
conductors are free from scratches/
rubs
b Check that all joints on conductor/
earth wire are away from the tower as
per the specified distance (at least 30
meters) and joints are as per the
approved drawings/ specification

Page 20 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
c Check that not more than one joint in a
sub conductor is provided in one span.
d Check that no mid span joints or repair
sleeves are provided in major crossings
for highway, Railway and major rivers.
e Check that all mid span joints on
conductors/ Earth wire and repair
sleeves of compression type are free
from sharp edges rust and dust
f Check that conductor is properly
clipped in the suspension clamp
g Check that armour rods are provided
on suspension towers
h Check that spacers/ spacer dampers
are provided between sub conductors
on each phase as per approved spacer
placement chart/ specification
i Check that all the spacers/ spacer-
dampers are properly tightened and
free from any external damage.
j Check that spacing of vibration
dampers from the tower and spacing
between damper to damper where two
vibration dampers provided are
properly fixed and tightened as per the
damper placement chart/ specification
k Check that all the jumpers are properly
fixed and torque tightened as per the
approved drawing/ specification
l Check that on conductors/ earth wires/
hardware fittings are free from all
foreign material like dead bird/ fallen
tree/ bird nests etc
m Digital Photographs indicating all
jumper bolts are provided and properly
tightened for atleast 10% jumper
connections are taken on random basis
and preserved
6 Clearances
a Check that right of way is not
obstructed by any tree etc (Refer Table-
1)
b Check that mid span clearance
between top conductor and earth wire
is adequate (Refer Table-2)

Page 21 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
c Check that lowest conductor and
ground clearance is more than the
required minimum clearance (Refer
Table-3)
d Check that sag and tension of the
section of the line is inline with sag and
tension calculation chart/ specification
approved by Engg.

Table-1: Clearance for right of way at different voltage level

Transmission voltage (kV) 132 220 400(S/C) 400 (D/C) ± 500 HVDC ± 800 HVDC 765(S/C) 765 (D/C)
ROW width (Meters) 27 35 52 46 52 69 85/ 64 67
Table-2: Minimum clearance for top conductor and Earth wire at mid-span

Voltage (kV) 132 220 400 765 ± 500 ± 800 HVDC

HVDC
Minimum mid span 6100 8500 9000 12000 (Suspension) 8500 12000(pole)
clearance (mm) 9000(Tension) 6100(DMR)

Table-3: Minimum ground clearance for different voltage level

Transmission voltage kV) 132 220 400 765 ± 500 HVDC ± 800 HVDC
Minimum Ground Clearance (mm) 6100 7015 8840 15000 12500 18000

7a Measurement of minimum clearance when line is crossing another Power line

Span (Tower location nos.) Crossing Power line details Clearance

(Name & voltage) (mm)

Note: Minimum clearance between power lines crossing each other:

SI Nominal 132KV 220KV 400KV +/- 500 kV 765 kV +/- 800 kV

No System Voltage HVDC HVDC
1. 132KV 3050 4580 5490 6860 7940 9040
2. 220KV 4580 4580 5490 6860 7940 9040
3. 400KV 5490 5490 5490 6860 7940 9040
4. +/- 500 kV HVDC 6860 6860 6860 6860 7940 9040
5. 765 kV 7940 7940 7940 7940 7940 9040
6. +/- 800 kV HVDC 9040 9040 9040 9040 9040 9040

Page 22 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

7b Measurement of minimum clearance when line is crossing Railway track

Span (Tower Railway track details Clearance

location nos.) (Name & voltage) (meters)

Note: Minimum clearance when power line crossing railway track:

(a) For Electrified Section:

Sl. Transmission line voltage Minimum clearances from Rail

No. level Level
At OHE At Mid OHE
Structures Span
1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 15.56 m 12.994 m
2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 16.46 m 14.524 m
3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 18.26 m 15.534 m
4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 19.16 m 17.884 m
5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 21.86 m 17.884 m

(b) For Non Electrified Section:

Sl. No. Transmission line voltage level Minimum clearances from Rail Level
1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 15.56 m
2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 16.46 m
3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 18.26 m
4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 19.16 m
5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 21.86 m

(c) Minimum Clearances between Highest Traction Conductor & Lowest Crossing
Conductor

Sl. Transmission line voltage Minimum Clearances between Highest

No. level Traction Conductor & Lowest Crossing
Conductor
1 Above 66 kV & upto 132 kV 3.05 m
2 Above 132 kV & upto 220 kV 4.58 m
3 Above 220 kV & upto 400 kV 5.49 m
4 Above 400 kV & upto 500 kV 7.94 m
5 Above 500 kV & upto 800 kV 7.94 m

Page 23 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

8. Measurement of tower footing resistance by Earth resistance tester or any other

suitable instrument (The value should not be more than 10 ohms)

Location Value (Ohms) Remarks

No.

The above inspection and measurements are carried out in the location mentioned above and
the remaining activities, temporary arrangements etc. are documented in format no:
OS/COMM/LINE/2

Erection Agency Supplier Agency Project Execution

Representative Representative (POWERGRID)
Signature
Date
Name
Organization

Note:
1. This format is to be filled for each tower location.
2. This format is to be kept at group head quarter with a copy to regional head quarter
3. This format to be signed not below the level of engineer and important locations like
river crossing, railway crossing, power line crossing etc. are to be countersigned by
minimum Manager for POWERGRID and in-charge of the working agency

Page 24 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
FORMAT NO: OS/COMM/LlNE/2

NAME OF LINE CIRCUIT DATE OF ENERGISATION

INSPECTION RECORD PRIOR TO HANDING OVER FOR ENERGIZATION

LIST OF REMAINING ACTIVITIES

LIST OF TEMPORARY ARRANGEMENTS

Region: Location Observation Completion Inspection

Section Sl. Tower From To Date Sign Date Sign Date Sign
A/B/C No. No.
Description of remaining
activities/ Temporary
arrangements

Erection Agency Erection Line In-charge

representative (POWERGRID) (POWERGRID)
Signature
Date
Name
Organization

Details of sections is to be furnished in this format:

a. Outstanding activities remaining in any part of the line

b. A list of temporary arrangements introduced.
c. Checklist records properly completed and signed as per format no: OS/COMM/ LINE/ 1
d. Original tracing of Profile, Route alignment, Tower Design, Structural Drawings, Bill of
material, Shop drawings, Stringing Charts indicating initial and final sag etc. of all towers
submitted to POWERGRID.

Note: This document is to be retained at DHQ (Divisional Head Quarter) with copy to RHQ
(Regional Head Quarter)

Page 25 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
FORMAT NO: OS/COMM/LlNE/3

NAME OF LINE CIRCUIT DATE OF ENERGISATION

HANDING OVER RECORD FOR ENERGIZATION

A: GENERAL DATA AND INFORMATION:

REGION Office TYPE OF TOWERS S/C D/C M/C

VOLTAGE RATING KV Tower locations From To
Total no. of towers Total length Kms.

Details:

SL DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS

NO YES NO Record Deficiencies If Any
1 Check list of entire section of the
line along with towers and
accessories under this Division have
carried out and documented in the
format no: OS/COMM/LINE/1
2 Inspection has been carried out in
all towers and the outstanding
issues along with temporary
arrangements are documented in
the format no: OS/COMM/LINE/ 2
3 No. of remaining activities/ points
are listed below and these are
minor in nature and do not stop
charging the line

HANDING OVER CHECK POINTS

Points according to Points completed

Points accepted
SECTION format no: OS/COMM/LINE/1 and confirmed
( Nos of remaining activities) Date Sign Date Sign
A

Page 26 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

SL DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS

NO YES NO Record Deficiencies If Any
4 All Electrical and Ground clearances are
as per the Approved drawings issued
from CC/ Engg. Dept have been
checked and no deviation has been
noted
5 All man and material and temporary
antitheft electrical connection, if any,
have been removed from all the
locations under this Division
6 All electrical clearance has been
received from CEA electrical inspector
for charging of the line vide order no:
Dated: (copy enclosed)
7 PTCC clearance has been received from
CEA’s PTCC Directorate for charging of
the line vide order no:
Dated: (copy enclosed)
8 All statutory rules and regulations
pertaining to line charging has been
carried out and Nothing is pending
9 All working agencies involved In
construction/ erection of this Line are
intimated regarding charging of this
line and further work, if any, are to be
carried out only after availing the
Permit to Work (PTW) from the
Concerned sub-station operating staff

10 The above line is handed over for Energization with/ without remaining activities

Handed over by Accepted for Energization

Signature
Date
Name
Designation Line In-charge Commissioning In-charge

Note: For details of section, please refer pre commissioning doc no : D-2-01-70-01-02, format
no OS/COMM/LINE/2

Page 27 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

FORMAT NO: OS/COMM/LlNE/4

NAME OF LINE CIRCUIT DATE OF ENERGISATION

COMMISSIONING FORMAT

A: GENERAL DATA AND INFORMATION:

REGION Office TYPE OF TOWERS S/C D/C M/C

VOLTAGE RATING KV Tower locations From To
Total no. of towers Total length Kms.

Details:

SL DESCRIPTION STATUS REMARKS

NO YES NO Record Deficiencies If Any
1 The entire section of the line handed
over for energization as per
POWERGRID format no:
OS/COMM/LINE/3 on Dated:
2 No. of remaining activities/ points are
listed as per format no: OS/COMM/2
and these are minor in nature and do
not stop charging the line
3 All the equipments involved in charging
of the line are tested and documented
as per the pre-commissioning formats
of bay equipment
4 Pre - commissioning tests of bay/
feeder as per approved document has
been completed and test results are
documented
5 In case, reactor provided in this line, all
tests are carried out as per prescribed
format and all test results are
documented
6 All electrical clearance has been
received from CEA electrical inspector
for charging of the line vide order no:
dated: (copy to be enclosed)
7 All man and material and temporary
antitheft electrical connection, if any,
removed from all the locations

Page 28 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
8 All electrical clearance has been
received from CEA electrical inspector
for charging of the line terminating
feeder vide order no :
dated:
9 PTCC clearance has been received from
CEA’s PTCC Directorate for charging of
the line vide order no:
Dated:
10 All statutory rules and regulations
pertaining to line charging has been
carried out and nothing is pending
11 All working agencies involved in
construction/ erection of this line and
sub-station Equipments are intimated
regarding charging of this line & bay
and further work, if any, are to be
carried out only after availing the
permit to work (PTW) from the
concerned sub-station operating staff
12 All the protections are checked and put
into service as per standard format no:
and documented

B. MEASUREMENT INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR BUS BAR (using 5 kV motorized

megger):

MEASURED VALUE CONDITION

BETWEEN REMARK
IN M - OHM
R-PHASE & GROUND All breakers and isolators
Y-PHASE & GROUND to be closed for section of
B-PHASE & GROUND the bus bar to be
energized and all ground
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE switch opened
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE
B-PHASE & R-PHASE
C. MEASUREMENT INSULATION RESISTANCE FOR LINE (using 5 kV/ 10 kV motorized
megger):

MEASURED VALUE CONDITION

BETWEEN REMARK
IN M - OHM
R-PHASE & GROUND All ground switches at
Y-PHASE & GROUND other end are opened.
B-PHASE & GROUND Min. value should be
approx. 150 Mega ohm
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE (value may change with
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE weather condition)
B-PHASE & R-PHASE

Page 29 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
D. CONTINUITY TEST OF THE LINE

a. For phase marking confirmation

SENDING END RECEIVING END MEASURED VALUE

REMARK
CONDITIONS Megger between IN OHMS
CLOSE R - PHASE GS R – PHASE & GROUND LOW
OPEN Y - PHASE GS Y – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN B - PHASE GS B – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN R - PHASE GS R – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
CLOSE Y - PHASE GS Y – PHASE & GROUND LOW
OPEN B - PHASE GS: B – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN R - PHASE GS R – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
OPEN Y - PHASE GS Y – PHASE & GROUND HIGH
CLOSE B - PHASE GS B – PHASE & GROUND LOW
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE LOW
CONNECT R & Y
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE HIGH
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
B-PHASE & R-PHASE HIGH
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE HIGH
CONNECT R & B
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE HIGH
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
B-PHASE & R-PHASE LOW
R-PHASE & Y-PHASE HIGH
CONNECT Y & B
Y-PHASE & B-PHASE LOW
PHASE, ALL GS OPEN
B-PHASE & R-PHASE HIGH

Note:
1. If the test values are as per the remark, phase marking at both ends are correct.
2. This test is to be done if the megger value do not show short circuit of the line with
ground or between phases in IR measurement

E Measurement of phase sequence

After closing the breaker from one end only the line can be charged.

a Check the phase sequence by the phase sequence meter by connecting at the
secondary of the CVT
OK Not OK

b Check the phase sequence by the help of multi-meter in case of a charged sub-
station at the secondary of the CVT (old & new) in the control panel as per the
measurement indicated below:

Page 30 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

Sl. Voltage measurement Measured Remarks

No. between voltage
New Charged (volts)
circuit old circuit
1 R-phase R-phase In case of correct phase sequence, the voltage
2 R-phase Y-phase measured between R & R phase, Y & Y phase, B
3 R-phase B-phase & B phase of old charged line and newly charged
4 Y-phase R-phase circuit will be zero or very small and all other
5 Y-phase Y-phase measurements will show full line CVT phase to
6 Y-phase B-phase phase secondary voltage
7 B-phase R-phase
8 B-phase Y-phase
9 B-phase B-phase
F Once the correct phase sequence is established, the charging instruction received from
CC (Engg/ CTU) to be followed and properly documented regarding status of various
parameters with other lines and generators, if any.

Charging instruction no: Dated: (Copy enclosed)

i. Charging details:
Date: Time:
ii Pre-charging conditions for sending end
a. Voltage kV

b. Generator Details:

Unit No Capacity MW Generated MVAR Remarks

Generated
1
2
3
4

c. Lines Connected:
Sl. No. Name of line MW MVAR Line Reactor
In service Capacity
1
2
3
4
5

Page 31 of 32
 POWER GRID CORPORATION OF INDIA LTD.
CORPORATE ASSET MANAGEMENT

DOCUMENT NO: D-2-01-70-01-02

DOCUMENT NAME: PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES & FORMATS FOR TRANSMISSION LINES

d. No. and rating of ICTs connected

Sl. No. Rating MW Tertiary reactor MVAR
Voltage MVA
1.
2.
3.
4.
e. Status of Bus Reactor, if any
Sl. No. Rating Status

iii On charging condition

Details Sending end Receiving end

Voltage N/A
MVAR N/A
Open end voltage N/A

iv Post charging condition

Details Sending end Receiving end

Voltage
MW
MVAR

The line has been/ not has been successfully test charged with or without following operational
constraints:

1.
2.
3.
4.

Signature

Name
Designation
Organization POWERGRID POWERGRID
Agency Line erection S/S erection Line supplier Line In- S/S In-charge
charge

Page 32 of 32
 Annexure-I

1. Site Acceptance Tests

Prior to installation, every spooled fibre optic cable segment shall be tested for
compliance with the Pre-shipment data previously received from the manufacturer.
This requirement will preclude the installation of out of specification cable segments
that may have been damaged during shipment.

SAT shall be carried out link by link from FODP to FODP. SAT may be performed in
parts in case of long links.

Sag and tension of OPGW shall generally be as per approved sag-tension chart and
during installation, sag and tension of OPGW shall be documented. Upon completion
of a continuous cable path, all fibres within the cable path shall be demonstrated for
acceptance of the cable path. Fibre Optic cable site testing minimum requirements
are provided in Table 1(a) through 1 (c) below:

Table 1 (a)

Fibre Optic Cable Pre-Installation Testing

Item: Description:

1. Physical Inspection of the cable assembly for damage

2. Optical fibre continuity and fibre attenuation with OTDR at 1550 nm

3. Fibre Optic Cable length measurement using OTDR

Table 1 (b)

Fibre Optic Cable Splicing Testing

Item: Description:

1. Per splice bi-directional average attenuation with OTDR

2. Physical inspection of splice box/enclosure for proper fibre / cable routing techniques

3. Physical inspection of sealing techniques, weather proofing, etc.

 Table 1 (c)

Fibre Optic Cable Commissioning Testing

Item: Description:
End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of each fibre at 1310
1.
nm and 1550 nm by OTDR.
End to End (FODP to FODP) bi-directional average attenuation of each fibre at 1310
2.
nm and 1550 nm by Power meter.
Bi-directional average splice loss by OTDR of each splice as well as for all splices in the
3.
link (including at FODP also).
Proper termination and labelling of fibres & fibre optic cables at FODP as per
4.
approved labelling plan.
-End of Table-